Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Series
09
A
INDEX This material has been prepared for those who use the products for
manufacturing assemblies, for holding electric works, for holding
maintenance and for the others acquainted with electric expertise
including those who operate the products (final users).
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 1
Features .............................................................................................................................................. 3
The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution (Product Skeleton) ..................................... 9
5. Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 47
Internal Accessories ......................................................................................................................................................... 47
1. Accessories ...............................................................................................................................................................................
2. Switch Operation and Rating .....................................................................................................................................................
47
47
2
3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories .............................................................................................................. 48
4. Shunt Trip (SHT) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 55
5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT) ............................................................................................................................................................. 55
6. Test Button Module (TBM) ......................................................................................................................................................... 56
7. Lead-wire Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................ 56
8. Internal Terminal (INT) ................................................................................................................................................................
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT) ....................................................................................................................................
56
57 3
10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) .......................................................................................................................................................... 58
11. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR) ............................................................................................................................... 59
External Accessories ....................................................................................................................................................... 60
1. F-type Operating Handle (Breaker Mount Type) ......................................................................................................................... 60
2. V-type Operating Handle (Door Mount Type) .............................................................................................................................. 63
3. S-type Operating Handle ............................................................................................................................................................ 68
4. Terminal Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................
5. Electrical Operation Device ........................................................................................................................................................
70
71
4
6. Mechanical Interlocks (MI) ......................................................................................................................................................... 79
7. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder ...................................................................................................................................... 80
8. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters ............................................................................................................................................ 80
9. Low-voltage switchgear Technical information service via the internet .............................. 185
(http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/haisei/lvs/)
9
Full range of MITS
(30A to 16
High-Performance
Downsizing of 630AF, New Digital ETR Glo
Compliance with w
Previous New
210 140
ASTA
1 x 104
275
257
Ir Switch
Current setting with fuse
3
1 x 10
EN
High
High-voltage fuse- voltage
Allowable short-time
Ip characteristics
TL
1 x 102 Low
Long-delay operating time voltage
GB
Time (s)
10 Pre-alarm
current Short-delay
Transformer
NFB
(electronic)
TUV
Is tripping current M
1 Load
Load current
Ts
Short-delay
operating time CCC JIS
0.1 Ii Instantaneous tripping current
0.01
Current (A) Current-converted value
on the high-voltage side
TPC
SABS
Best Solution
CCS LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
W o r l d S u p e r
22
17
7 8 9
23
18
6
24
19
15 14
Series
20
5 4 7 8 9 3 2
21
10 11 12 13
1
UBISHI WS Series
00A frame)
Reliable
bal
obal High reliability, Best performance
orldwide standards Relay JPT Mechanism Breaking Performance
Terminal
CSA
UL
Intelligent
Measuring and communicating
By using various application software for PLC, users can also connect to the
Personal network SCADA system.
Computer
MELSECNET/10
Interface card MELSECNET/10
CC-Link®
MDU
AE-SW
2
Global Compliance with worldwide standards
W o r l d S u p e r
ASTA
CSA
EN
TUV GB
JIS
UL Series
CCC
TPC
IEC
SABS
International Japan Europe China USA Canada UK Germany Norway USA France Japan China
Standards
NF250-SGW 3P
3
W o r l d S u p e r
Downsizing,
High-Performance New Digital ETR Series
275
257
● Improved breaking capacity at 690VAC (NF400-HEW, NF630-HEW)
New
Previous
Icu/Ics
Icu/Ics
15/15 kA 35/18 kA
Volume 60% downsized
Previous New
1 x 104 1 x 104 Switch
Ir Ir
Current setting Current setting with fuse
1 x 103 1 x 103 High-voltage fuse- High
voltage
Allowable short-time
Ip characteristics
TL
1 x 102 1 x 102 Low
Long-delay operating time voltage
Time (s)
Time (s)
Transformer
10 10 Pre-alarm
current NFB
Short-delay Short-delay (electronic)
1 1 Short-delay Load
Load current operating time
Ts
0.1 0.1 Ii Instantaneous tripping current
4
Reliable High reliability, Best performance
JPT
Terminal
• IP20 Mold-cover Finger
protection
• Front compression terminal
⇔ Box terminal ⇔ Rear ⇔
PM
[Advanced ISTAC]
Advanced Impulsive Slot-Type Accelerator [Adopted
RGW, UGW
on SGW,HGW,
]
[Shunt-less]
Shunt-less Current Flow Technology [Adopted on SGW,
HGW, RGW, UGW]
Double plates conductors hold the movable conductor without Movable contact
flexible wires. This shunt-less structure achieves the increased Holder
operating cycles.
Endurance (times)
50,000
(C-O cycles) Electrical Mechanical
40,000
30,000
20,000 Spring
10,000 Movable contact
revolving shaft
0
NF125-SGW/HGW NF160-SGW/HGW NF250-SGW/HGW During revolution the movable contact is constantly
in contact with the holder, maintaining current flow.
5
W o r l d S u p e r
Series
10 NF250-UGW
8
6
100 1
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
100
85 75 I2t let-through characteristics (400VAC)
75 (✕106) 10
8
70 6
65 4 NF250-HGW
50 50 30
30 20 U(UGW) 0.6
0.4
0 R(RGW)
230VAC 0.2 NF250-UGW
380VAC 400VAC 8 H(HGW)
415VAC 0.1
S(SGW) Series
0.08
440VAC
500VAC 0.06
690VAC 0.04
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
Type NF160-SGW/HGW
Hi
NF125-SGW/HGW
Lo
T
Overload Protection (Thermal)
Tripping threshold lr (A) 16-25 25-40 40-63 63-100 80-125 125-160 160-250
No Protection
Neutral protection (✽1) 4P3E
4P4E 1 ✕ lr
lr li l
NF160-SGW/HGW
Type
LN326N429-11 MODEL
T Ir Hi
MADE IN JAPAN
RE250 ln 250 A
Ip
TL Is NF125-SGW/HGW
AC only 50/60Hz Ts
Ii 70% PAL OVER Lo
Ir (A) TEST T L(s) Is (XIr) Ts (s) Ip (XIr) I pN
I
200 80 4 5 6 2 Ii (X250A) 8 10 8.5 9
60 3.5 1 8 4P3E 4P4E
160 3 7 6
2.5 8
12 7.5 9.5
Overload Protection
125 250 12 100 2 10 0.6 3 4 14 7 10
Tripping threshold lr (A) 16-32 32-63 63-100 75-125 80-160 125-250
Tripping time TL(s) 12-60-80-100 step adjustable (at 2 ✕ lr)
LTD
Neutral protection (Slectable) 0-1 ✕ lr (Step adjustable)
T lr Short-Circuit Protection
lp Pickup current ls 2-2.5-3-3.5-4-5-6-7-8-10 ✕ lr step adjustable
STD
Tripping time Ts(s) 0.06-0.1-0.2-0.3 step adjustable (at 1.5 ✕ ls)
INST Tripping threshold li 4 to 14 ✕ ln continuous adjustable
6
Best Solution Abundant Accessories and Easy Installation
Internal Accessories
The adoption of cassette-type internal accessories simplifies use, and 3-way Lead Wire (adjustable)
the common use of different voltages realizes a major reduction in the
number of types. Additionally, UVTs are now available for ELCBs and
time delay types have been expanded, offering a wider range of
applications.
✽ Cassette-type Accessories
Giving greater flexibility when upgrading circuits, cassette-type
accessories make ordering easy and enable simple, one-touch
installation. Insulation also improves safety.
Compatible with all breaker series
The alarm switch (AL), auxiliary switch (AX), shunt trip (SHT),
and undervoltage trip (UVT) all come as cassette-type
accessories compatible with all breaker series. 1.Push the trip button 2.Loosen the front 3.Open the front 4.Install the 5.Close the front cover
(PTT) cover screws cover accessories and tighten the screws.
External Handle
A safer and easy-to-operate handle has been adopted.
✽ Complies with IP65 protection rating standards.
✽ Isolation function achieved through combination with the breaker unit.
✽ Structured to allow relay adjustments after installation as well.
✽ Equipped with a cylinder key (optional) to prevent misuse.
V-Handle
7
W o r l d S u p e r
Series
Handle Locks
With the WS Series, ON/OFF locking is
possible with the use of a padlock.
Up to three padlocks may be attached.
✽ Customers are requested to use their
own padlocks. ON lock OFF lock
By using various application software for PLCs, users can also connect to the SCADA
Personal system.
computer
MELSECNET/10
interface card MELSECNET/10
CC-Link®
MDU
AE-SW
8
Product Skeleton
16
10
22
17
23
18
24
19
20
5 4
21
10
9
W o r l d S u p e r
Series
1 MCCB
2 Relay unit (Thermal type) (RT) (✽1)
3 Relay unit (Electronic type) (RE) (✽1)
4 Relay unit (Magnetic only type) (RM) (✽1)
5 Relay unit (Switch-disconnector type) (✽1)
15 14
7 8 9 3 2
11 12 13
10
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models
Series Configuration
Molded-case circuit breakers
11
1
Economy type
Economy type
Economy type
NV63-CW NV125-CW NV250-CW NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV400-SW NV630-SW
NV-S NV63-SW NV125-SW NV250-SW NV800-SEW
Standard type NV400-SEW NV630-SEW
NV-H NV32-SW
High-performance type NV400-HEW
NV63-HW NV125-HW NV250-HW NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
NV400-REW
MB30-CS MB50-CW
MB
breakers
Frame A
UL listed products Series 50 100 150 225 250 400 600
UL489 Listed NF100-CWU NF-SJW
NF-UL NV-UL Molded-case circuit breaker
NF50-SWU
NF100-SWU
NF-SFW NF225-CWU
NF-HJW
NF-SKW NF-SLW
Earth-leakage protector
products
UL489 Listed
UL listed
( Detailsuponwillrequest.
be available
)
( Detailsuponwillrequest.
be available
)
12
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Image
3 5 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20 10 (15) 16 20 25 (30) 50 (60) 63 (75) 80
Rated current in (Amp.) 15 20 30 16 20 25 (30) 32 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60) 63 100 125
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500 600 600 600 690 600
690V – – – – 2.5/1 –
525V – – – – – –
500V – 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 7.5/4 7.5/4
Rated AC 440V – 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 (50/60Hz) 415V 1.5/1.5 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
breaking (Icu/Ics) 400V 1.5/1.5 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
capacities (kA) 380V 1.5/1.5 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 10/5
230V 2.5/2 (240V) 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8 25/13 30/15
250V – 2.5/1 (✽4) – 2.5/1 (✽4) – 7.5/4 (✽4) – 7.5/4 (✽4) – 7.5/4 (✽1)
DC
300V – – – – – –
Suitability for isolation – ● ● ● ● ●
Utilization category A A A A A A
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) – ● ● ● ● ●
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 4 6 6 6 6 8
Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 3
without current 10,000 10,000 10,000 15,000 15,000 10,000
440V-In/2 6,000 (415V) 6,000 6,000 15,000 15,000 6,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-In 6,000 (415V) 6,000 6,000 8,000 8,000 6,000
with current
690V-In/2 – – – – – –
690V-In – – – – –- –
a ca a 45 67.5 50 75 50 75 50 75 100 50 75 100 60 90
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 96 130 130 130 130 130
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 90
Mass of front-face type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.4 0.55 0.45 0.6 0.45 0.6 0.7 0.45 0.6 0.7 0.65 0.9
Screw terminal ● ● ● ● ● ●
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) – – – – – ●
Fixed
Busbar terminal – – – – – –
Installation
and Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ● ●
connections Rear (PM) – ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – – – –
IEC 35mm Mounting hook (option) – ● ● ● ● –
rail Adapter (option) ● – – – – ●
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) – ● ● ● ● ●
(option) (✽ 5)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) – ● ● ● ● ●
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) – – – – – ●
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ● ● ●
connection with Internal terminal type (INT) – – – – – –
(option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) (✽ 3) (PAL) – – – – – –
accessories
(option) Overcurrent trip alarm (✽ 3) (OAL) – – – – – –
(S) ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) – ● ● ● – ● – ●
Waterproof (W) – – ● – ● – ● – – ● – – ●
Electrical operation device (MD) – – – – – – ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) – ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL-S) – ● ● ● ● ●
Lock cover (LC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
External
accessories External Mounted on breaker (F) – ● ● ● ● ●
(option) operating
handle (V) – ● ● ● ● ●
Door mounting
(S) – ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) – ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) – ● ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Small (TC-S) ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● ● ● ●
for plug-in (PTC) – ● ● ● ● ●
L/R ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
G/L – ● ● ● – ● – ●
Marine approval BV – ● ● ● – ● – ●
DNV – ● ● ● – ● – ●
ABS ● ● ● ● – ● – ●
Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Hydraulic- Thermal-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic
Trip button – Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Note (✽ 1) Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. If wired as shown on the
right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400VDC and 500VDC, Line Line
respectively.
(✽ 2) Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. If wired as shown on the
right, three and four poles can be used for up to 500VDC and 600VDC,
respectively.
(✽ 3) PAL and OAL are not available together. Only one can be specified.
(✽ 4) Specify if for DC use. Load Load
(✽ 5) Cassette-type accessories are not compatible with NF30-CS. 3-pole 4-pole
13
S Series H Series U Series
125 125 125
NF125-SW
NF125-SGW
RT
NF125-SGW
RE NF125-HW
NF125-HGW
RT
NF125-HGW
RE
NF125-RGW
RT
NF125-UGW
RT
2
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 16–25 25–40 40–63 16–32 32–63 63–100 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 16–25 25–40 40–63 16–32 32–63 63–100 16–25 25–40 16–25 25–40
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 63–100 80–125 75–125 50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100 63–100 80–125 75–125 40–63 63–100 40–63 63–100
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 2 3 4
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
8/4 8/8 8/8 10/5 20/20 20/20 25/25 30/30
18/5 22/22 22/22 22/11 35/35 35/35 125/125 200/200
18/9 30/30 30/30 30/15 50/50 50/50 125/125 200/200
25/13 36/36 36/36 50/25 65/65 65/65 125/125 200/200
30/15 36/36 36/36 50/25 70/70 70/70 125/125 200/200
30/15 36/36 36/36 50/25 75/75 75/75 125/125 200/200
30/15 36/36 36/36 50/25 75/75 75/75 125/125 200/200
50/25 85/85 85/85 100/50 100/100 100/100 125/125 200/200
15/8 (✽1) – – 40/20 (✽1) – – – –
– 20/20 (✽ 2) – – 40/40 (✽ 2) – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A A A A A A A A
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
25,000 50,000 50,000 25,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000
20,000 40,000 40,000 20,000 40,000 40,000 40,000 40,000
10,000 30,000 30,000 10,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 30,000
1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
60 90 120 105 140 105 140 90 120 105 140 105 140 105 105 140
130 165 165 130 165 165 240 240
68 86 86 68 86 86 86 86
90 110 110 90 110 110 110 110
0.7 0.95 1.3 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 0.8 0.95 1.3 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6 3.1 3.1 3.9
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● – – ● ● –
– ● ● – ● ● – –
– – – – – – – – – –
● – – – ● – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● – ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
– – ● – – ● – –
– – ● – – ● – –
● – – – ● – – – – –
● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – – –
● – ● – ● – ● – ● – ● – – –
– ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – ● – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
● – ● ● ● – ● ● ● ● –
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal-
magnetic magnetic Electronic magnetic magnetic
magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
14
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Image
Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 160 125–160 80–160 125 150 160 125–160 80–160
15
C Series S Series H Series U Series
250 250 250 250
16
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Image
250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 200~400 200~400 200~400
Rated current In (Amp.) adjustable adjustable adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690
690V – 10/10(5/5) (✽1) 10/10(5/5) (✽1) 35/18 –
500V 15/8 30/30(25/25) (✽1) 30/30(25/25) ✽1 50/50 70/35
Rated 440V 25/13 42/42(36/36) (✽1) 42/42(36/36) (✽1) 65/65 125/63
AC
short-circuit IEC 60947-2 (50/60Hz) 415V 36/18 45/45(36/36) (✽1) 50/50(36/36) (✽1) 70/70 125/63
breaking (Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 45/45(36/36) (✽1) 50/50(36/36) (✽1) 70/70 125/63
capacities (kA) 380V 40/20 50/50(42/42) (✽1) 50/50(42/42) (✽1) 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 85/85(65/65) (✽1) 85/85(65/65) (✽1) 100/100 150/75
DC 250V 20/10 ✽4 40/40 ✽4 – – –
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ● ●
Utilization category A A B B B
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA) – – 5 5 5
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked) ● ● ● ● ●
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 8
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
a ca a 140 140 185 140 185 140 185 140
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 257 257 257 257 257
b c 103 103 103 103 103
ca 134 155 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 4.4 5.0 4.6 5.2 6.8 6.0 7.6 6.0 7.6 6.0
Screw terminal – – – – –
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● – –
Installation Fixed
Busbar terminal ● ● ● ● ●
and
connections Rear (B) ● ● ● ● ●
Rear (PM) ● ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – – –
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ● ●
(option)
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N) ● ● ● ● ●
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S) ● ● ● ● ●
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ● ●
connection with Internal terminal type (INT) – – – – –
(option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ● ●
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) (✽ 3) (PAL) – – ● (✽2) ● (✽2) ● (✽2)
accessories
(option) Overcurrent trip alarm (✽ 3) (OAL) – – – – –
(S) – – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● ● – ● – – –
Waterproof (W) ● ● – ● – – –
Motor-
Electrical operated type (MD) ● ● ● ● ●
operation
Spring-
device
charge type
(MDS) ● ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ● ●
(HL) ● ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL-S) ● ● ● ● ●
External Lock cover (LC) – – – – –
accessories
(option) External Mounted on breaker (F) ● ● ● ● ●
operating
handle (V) ● ● ● ● ●
Door mounting
(S) ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● – –
Small (TC-S) – – – – –
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● – ● –
for plug-in (PTC) ● ● – ● – ● – ●
L/R ● ● – ● – ● – ●
G/L ● ● – ● – ● – ●
Marine approval BV ● ● – ● – ● – ●
DNV – – – ● – – – –
ABS ● ● – ● – ● – ●
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Note (✽ 1) In case of solderless terminal, breaking capacity decreases to ( / ).
(✽ 2) Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is Line Line
necessary. (Standard type is with SLT equipped.)
(✽ 3) PAL and OAL are not available together. Only one can be specified.
(✽ 4) Use two poles for three- and four-pole products. If wired as shown on the
right, three and four poles can be used for up to 400VDC and 500VDC,
respectively.
Load Load
3-pole 4-pole
17
U Series C Series S Series H Series
400 630 630 630 630
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● – −
– – – – – –
– ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● – ● –
– ● ● – ● – ● – ●
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
– – – – – ● – – – –
● – ● ● – ● – ● – ●
Electronic Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic Electronic
magnetic magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
18
2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Image
19
U Series S Series
800 1000 1250 1600
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● – – – – –
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
– – – – – –
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
– ● ● ● – –
– – – – – –
– – – – – –
● – – – – –
– – – – – –
– ● – ● – – – –
– ● – ● – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– ● – ● – – – –
Electronic Electronic Electronic Thermal- Electronic Magnetic
magnetic
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
20
2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Image
21
S Series H Series U Series C Series S Series H Series U Series
125 125 125 250 250 250 250
22
2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Image
Rated current In (Amp.) 250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 200~400 adjustable 200~400 adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 3 3 3 4 3 4
100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) (✽3) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button Button
AC440V 25/13 42/42(36/36) (✽1) 42/42(36/36) (✽1) 65/65
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 2nd. ed (Icu/Ics) AC400V 36/18 45/45(36/36) (✽1) 50/50(36/36) (✽1) 70/70
AC230V 50/25 85/85(65/65) (✽1) 85/85(65/65) (✽1) 100/100
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ●
a ca a 140 140 140 185 140 185
c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 257 257 257 257
b c 103 103 103 103
ca 134 155 155 155
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 5.6 5.9 6.6 8.2 6.6 8.2
Screw terminal – – – –
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● –
Fixed
Installation and Busbar terminal ● ● ● ●
connections Rear (B) ● ● ● ●
Rear (PM) ● ● ● ●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20 (PM-IP) – – – –
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ●
(option) ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trip (UVT) Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous closing (UVT-S) ● ● ● ●
Insulation switch (MG) ● ● ● ●
Built-in Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL) ● ● ● ●
accessories Test button module (TBM) ● ● ● ●
(option) Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL) – – ● (✽2) ● (✽2)
Overcurrent trip alarm (OAL) – – – –
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ●
connection (option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ●
(S) – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● ● ● – –
Waterproof (W) ● ● ● – –
Electrical operation device (MD) ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ●
Handle lock
(HL) ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device (HL-S) ● ● ● ●
Lock cover (LC) – – – –
External
accessories External Mounted on breaker (F) ● ● ● ●
(option) operating
handle (V) ● ● ● ●
Door mounting
(S) ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● –
Small (TC-S) – – – –
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● – ●
for plug-in (PTC) ● ● ● ●
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Note (✽ 1) In case of solderless terminal, breaking capacity decreases to ( / ).
(✽ 2) Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if order output is necessary. (Standard type is with SLT equipped.)
(✽ 3) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V. Rated operational voltage Available voltage range
(✽ 4) Specify if for CE marking. Type CE marking is only Front connection and Rear connection. 100 - 440V 80~484V
200 - 440V 160~484V
23
H Series C Series S Series H Series S Series H Series
400 630 630 630 800 800
24
2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
Image
25
S Series H Series U Series C Series S Series H Series U Series
125 125 125 250 250 250 250
26
2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
Image
Rated current In (Amp.) 250 300 350 400 250 300 350 400 200~400 Adjustable 200~400 Adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 40 40 40
Number of poles 3 3 3 4 3 4
100–440 100–440 100–440 100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V) (✽3) Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500
High-speed type Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s) Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1• 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button Button
AC440V 25/13 42/42(36/36) (✽ 1) 42/42(36/36) (✽ 1) 65/65
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2, EN60947-2 (Icu/Ics) AC400V 36/18 45/45(36/36) (✽ 1) 50/50(36/36) (✽ 1) 70/70
AC230V 50/25 85/85(65/65) (✽ 1) 85/85(65/65) (✽ 1) 100/100
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8
without current 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000
Number of operating cycles 440V-In/2 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
with current
440V-In 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
Suitability for isolation ● ● ● ●
ca a 140 140 140 185 140 185
a c
Overall dimensions (mm) b 257 257 257 257
b c 103 103 103 103
ca 134 155 155 155
Mass of front-face type (kg) 6.1 6.4 6.6 8.2 6.6 8.2
Screw terminal – – – –
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL) ● ● ● ●
Installation and Fixed
connections
Busbar terminal ● ● ● ●
Rear (B) ● ● ● ●
Plug-in Rear (PM) – – – –
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch (AX) ● ● ● ●
accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● ● ● ●
(option) Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N) ● ● ● ●
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Synchronous closing (UVT-S) ● ● ● ●
Insulation switch (MG) – – – –
Earth-leakage trip alarm (EAL) – – – –
Built-in Test button module (TBM) ● ● ● ●
accessories Pre-alarm-contact output (PAL) – ● (✽ 2) ● (✽ 2)
(option) –
Overcurrent trip alarm (OAL) – – – –
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block (SLT) ● ● ● ●
connection (option) with Flying leads ● ● ● ●
(S) – – – –
Dustproof
Enclosure (I) ● ● ● – –
Waterproof (W) ● ● ● – –
Electrical operation device (MD) ● ● ● ●
Mechanical interlock (MI) ● ● ● ●
Handle lock
(HL) ● ● ● ●
Handle lock device (HL-S) ● ● ● ●
Lock cover (LC) – – – –
External
accessories External Mounted on breaker (F) ● ● ● ●
(option) operating (V) ● ● ● ●
Door mounting
handle (S) ● ● ● ●
Insulating Between phase (BA-F) ● ● ● ●
barrier To ground (BA-G) ● ● ● ●
Large (TC-L) ● ● ● –
Small (TC-S) – – – –
Terminal
cover Transparent (TTC) ● ● ● ●
for rear connection (BTC) ● ● ● – ●
for plug-in (PTC) – – – –
Thermal- Thermal- Electronic Electronic
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
CE marking ● ● ● ●
Note (✽ 1) In case of solderless terminal, breaking capacity decreases to ( / ).
(✽ 2) Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if order output is necessary. (Standard type is with SLT equipped.)
(✽ 3) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V. Rated operational voltage Available voltage range
100 - 440V 85~484V
200 - 440V 160~484V
27
H Series C Series S Series H Series S Series H Series
400 630 630 630 800 800
28
2. Detailed Specifications
Motor-Protection Breakers
a ca
c
Overall
b c 52 68 68 68 68 68
ca 67 90 90 90 90 92
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 0.25 0.35 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.95 1.5
Rear connection (B) ● Round stud (assembled in) ● Round stud ● Round stud ● Round stud ● Flat stud ● Flat stud
Plug-in (PM) – ● ● ● ● ●
Remark: 1. The products with rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.
29
2. Detailed Specifications
UL Listed Products
Image
2
Rated current In (Amp.) 50 60 75 125 150 175 (3) 5 10 15 15 20 30 15 20 30 40 50 (125) (150) 125 150 175 250 300
40 50 60 60 70 80 90 100 175 200 500 600
at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C) 100 200 225 20 30 40 50 75 100 110 125 150 225 250 200 225 250 350 400
Number of poles 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated voltage (V AC) 240 240 240 480Y/277 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
600Y/347V – – – – 14 14 18 20 20
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
UL 489 480V – – – – 35 35 50 35 35
AC
480Y/277V – – – 22 35 35 50 – –
240V 10 35 14 35 65 65 100 65 85
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V – – – 8/4 8/8 8/8 15/15 10/10 (5/5) (✽ 5) 10/10
500V 7.5/4 10/5 7.5/4 18/9 30/30 30/30 36/36 30/30 (25/25) (✽ 5) 30/30
440V 10/5 15/8 7.5/4 25/13 36/36 36/36 50/50 42/42 (36/36) (✽ 5) 42/42
IEC 60947-2
AC 415V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50 45/45 (36/36) (✽ 5) 45/45
(Icu/Ics)
400V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50 45/45 (36/36) (✽ 5) 45/45
380V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50 50/50 (42/42) (✽ 5) 50/50
230V 30/15 35/18 15/8 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/100 85/85 (65/65) (✽ 5) 85/85
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 0.7 0.95 1.5 0.45 0.6 0.7 0.95 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.7 9.6
Front Solderless
connection terminal (box)
(SL) ● – – ● ● ● ● ● ●
Busbar terminal (BAR) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Alarm switch (AL) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Accessories (✽ 2)
F ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Operating handle S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(option)
V ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Insulating barrier (IB) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Terminal Large (TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
cover Small (TC-S) – – (✽ 4) – – – – – – –
IEC 35mm rail fixture – – Supplied standardly – – – – – –
Thermal- Thermal- Hydraulic- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal- Thermal-
Automatic tripping device magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic magnetic adjustable magnetic adjustable magnetic magnetic adjustable
Trip button Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
30
2. Detailed Specifications
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Type BH BH- P
Frame (A) 70 100 100 70 100 100
Image
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
AC230/400V 3 — 3 —
Breaking capacity IEC 60898
AC400V — 3 — 3
(kA) sym.
— DC125V 1 1
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c b 95 74
Dimensions
(mm)
b c 57.5 60.5
ca 77.5 79
Connection (✽ 1)
Terminal cover ● —
Mounting plate ● —
Optional
accessories
Terminal base — ●
Lock cover ● ●
31
Type BH- S M 3 BH- S M 6
2
Image
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
AC230/400V 3 — 6 —
IEC 60898
Breaking capacity
AC400V — 3 — 6
(kA) sym.
— DC125V — 1 — — 1 —
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c
b 95 95
Dimensions
(mm) b c 57.5 57.5
ca 76 76
Clamp terminal
Connection (✽ 1)
Terminal cover ●
Mounting plate ●
Optional
accessories
Handle lock ●
Lock cover —
Approved by —
Note (✽1) If required solderless terminal can be supplied. (Line and Load side)
(✽2) Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
32
2. Detailed Specifications
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Image
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
AC230/400V 3 — 9 —
IEC 60898
Breaking capacity
AC400V — 3 — 9
(kA) sym.
— DC125V — 1 — —
a 25 50 75 25 50 75
ca
a c
b 81.5 81.5
Dimensions
(mm) b c 60.5 60.5
ca 79 79
Connection
Terminal cover —
Terminal base ●
Optional
accessories
Lock cover —
Handle lock ●
Approved by — LR
Note (✽1) Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
33
MCB BH- D6 (IEC 60898) BH-DN (IEC 60898)
Image
2
Number of poles 1 2 3 4 (3+N) 2 (1+N) 2 (1+N)
Rated voltage (VAC) 230/ 400 400 400 400 230 230
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC 60898) 6 4.5
Tripping characteristics Type B, C, D (✽1) Type B, C (✽1) Type C
ca a 18 36 54 72 36 18
a c
Dimensions b 87 88
(mm) b c 44 44
ca 70 70
Mass (kg) 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.6 0.30 0.12
Connection Solderless
Automatic tripping device Thermal, magnetic
Optional accessories Insulating barrier — 1 pc 2 pcs 3 pcs 1 pc —
Note (✽1) Type B (3 In <, 5 In), Type C (5 In <, 10 In), Type D (10 In <, 20 In)
Image Photo
Image
34
2. Detailed Specifications
ELRs and ZCTs
Earth-Leakage Relays
Interchangeable leakage relays (✽ 1)
Harmonic surge ready Harmonic surge ready
Type Electrical self-hold type Mechanical self-hold type
Electrical self-hold type Mechanical self-hold type
Hole diameter mm NV-ZBA NV-ZSA NV-ZHA NV-ZLA
15 ZT15B – ZT15B – ZT15B ZT15B
30 ZT30B – ZT30B – ZT30B ZT30B
Model name of ZCT combined 40 ZT40B – ZT40B – ZT40B ZT40B
(✽ 5) 60 – ZT60B – ZT60B ZT60B ZT60B
80 – ZT80B – ZT80B ZT80B ZT80B
100 – ZT100B – ZT100B ZT100B ZT100B
Image
UL1053 UL1053
US UL standard (UR certified) – – Recognized component Recognized component
(File No.E196562) (File No.E196562)
Canada CSA standard – – LR103083(Certified No.) LR103083(Certified No.)
Declaration for conformity Declaration for conformity
European CE marking – – IEC 60947-2 AnnexB IEC 60947-2 AnnexB
EN 60947-2 AnnexB EN 60947-2 AnnexB
Note (✽1) Interchangeable leakage relays can be easily combined with other relays and our ZCT. However, products with Remark: 1. Relays with rates shown in parentheses ( ) are
30mA sensitivity (excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can only be used in combination with ZT15B, ZT30B and ZT40B. special-order.
(✽2) Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and JIS standards are indicated together. For JIS voltage 2. The relay complies with CE marking conformity
indications, 100-200V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover is 240-440V changeover, and declaration only when used with CE marking type
460V and 480V are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/JIS”. MITSUBISHI MCCB with a voltage tripping device to
✽
( 3) Indicates the UL-standard control voltage. UL, CSA and CE standards are indicated together. For CE voltage interrupt current during ground fault.
indications, 120-230V changeover is 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeoever is 240-440V selectable, which 3. NV-ZBA/ZSA
are described together. When ordering, specify “UL/CE”. Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
✽
( 4) When operating times are 0.3 and 0.45sec, 0.8 and 1.0sec and 1.6sec, the relay operates between 0.15 and 120V 80~126V 100 • 110V • 120V
0.45sec, 0.6 and 1.0sec and 1.2 and 2.0sec, respectively. 240V 160~252V 200 • 220 • 240V
(✽5) Can be combined with an interchangeable ZCT equipped with a primary conductor. Refer to the next page for 415V 320~484V 400 • 415 • 440V
details. 4.NV-ZHA/ZLA
(✽6) Not UL-certified.
Control voltage Available voltage range Example of applicable circuit voltage
120V 80~132V 100 • 110 • 120V
240V 160~264V 200 • 220 • 230 • 240V
440V 304~484V 380 • 400 • 415 • 440V
35 480V 368~528V 460 • 480V
Interchangeable ZCT
Type Z T15B Z T30B Z T40B Z T60B Z T80B Z T100B
Aperture diameter (mm) 15 30 40 60 80 100
Mass (kg)
Rated short time current
0.2 0.4 0.6
50 (peak value)
2.0 2.6 3.3
2
Dimensions (mm) a 48 68 85 140 160 185
b 52 52 52 90 90 90
e
d
a d 25 50 50 100 100 100
e 40 40 40 70 70 70
1ø2w Polyvinyl chloride insulated wire 14 (88) 60 (217) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992) 800 (1185)
Cross- linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 38 (190) 60 (260) 250 (655) 400 (870) 600 (1140)
1ø3w
Polyvinyl- chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 250 (556) 500 (842) 725 (1095)
3ø3w
Cross- linked polyethylene insulated cable 2 (33) 22 (135) 60 (260) 200 (560) 325 (760) 600 (1140)
3ø4w Polyvinyl- chloride insulated wire 8 (61) 38 (162) 100 (298) 150 (395) 325 (650) 600 (992)
Cross- linked polyethylene insulated cable — 14 (105) 38 (190) 100 (365) 250 (655) 400 (870)
c c 42 78 79
c c 42 78 79 111
Control voltage (VAC) Rated current sensitivity (mA) Max. operating time (s) Inertial non- operating time (s)
ZBA 120 • 240 (✽ 1) 100 • 200 • 500 (✽ 1)
High- speed type 0.1 —
120 • 240 (✽ 1),
ZSA 100 • 200 • 500 (✽ 1)
240 • 415 (✽ 1)
ZBA 120 • 240 (✽ 1) 100 • 200 • 500 (✽ 1) 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 (✽ 1) 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
Frame (A) 30
Type CP30-BA CP-S
Image
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5 2.5
Rated current (A) 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.75 1 2 2.5 3 5 7 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
AC (V) 250 250 –
Rated voltage (V)
UL 1077 DC (V) 65 125 – 65 –
CSA C22.2 No.235 (✽ 11) AC 2.5kA at 250V 1.5kA at 250V –
DC 2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V – 1kA at 65V –
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
IEC 60934 1.5kA at 230V
EN 60934 AC 250 2.5kA at 120V
GB 17701 (✽ 11)
1kA at 120V
Rated short-circuit (Icn) DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V – 1kA at 60V 1kA at 60V
(1kA at 60V) (✽ 7)
capacity (kA)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 250
1.5kA at 250V
JIS C 4610 AC 2.5kA at 230V
2.5kA at 125V
(Icn)
1kA at 125V
DC 2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V – 1kA at 65V 1kA at 65V
(1kA at 65V) (✽ 7)
EN 60947-2 Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 250 –
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2-1 Ann1 AC 2.5/2.5kA at 230V –
(Icu/Ics) DC 2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V – –
AC-DC common use ● – (✽1) – (✽ 8)
Reverse connection ● –
AC250V 50/60Hz 1500A 0.02s
Rated short time current AC125V 50/60Hz 2500A 0.02s
–
(for switch only type) DC65V 1000A 0.02s
DC125V 1000A 0.02s
Rated ambient temperature (°C) 40 (T40) 25 (T25)
Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD); Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD);
Operating characteristics
Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (✽ 2) Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO] Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO]
Mode of tripping Medium type (M), (MD) Medium type (M), (MD)
Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM] Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM]
Fast type (F) Fast type (F), (FD)
Method of operation S-type (IEC 60934)
Trip-free behaviour Trip-free (IEC 60934)
Mass (kg) 0.08 0.16 0.23 0.06 0.12 0.18
Retractable small terminal cover (TC-S) ● Standard IP20 (front, terminal covers closed) [Certified of TUV] –
Inertial delay (ID) ● (Medium, Slow type: AC only) ● (Medium, Slow, Fast type:AC only)
Alarm switch (AL) ● (1c) ● (1c) (✽ 7)
Auxiliary switch (AX) ● (1c) ● (1c)
Accessories Shunt trip (SHT) ● (for relay type) (✽ 3) ● (for parallel and relay type:AC only)
Large terminal cover (TC-L) ● (✽ 6) –
Flushpanel mounting brackets (FP) ● –
Back facing wiring termnal (BT) ● (✽ 4), (✽ 6) –
Lock cover (LC) – ● –
Accessory terminal cover (TC) ● (✽ 6) –
20A or less : Screw terminal M4 Male tub terminal 6.3mm (#250)
Main body
Connection 30A : Screw termnal M5 [Screw terminal M4 (series type only)]
Alarm switch / Auxiliary switch Screw terminal M3.5 Male tub terminal 2.8mm (#110)
Srface, IEC rail mounting
Main body mounting method Panel mounting
Flush panel mounting (option)
International standard UL(cURus), CCC (✽ 5) UL(UR) (✽ 9), (✽ 10) –
Operating characteris is
CE Marking
EN 60934 : TUV approval
EN 60934 : TUV approval (✽ 10)
Medium type (M) only.
The rated current, 0.3A,
EN 60947-2 : Self-declaration (✽ 5) 2A, 3A and 7A are not
applied.
Note (✽1) The 3-pole products are for AC use only.
(✽2) Contact us for operating characteristics other than those mentioned above.
(✽3) In poles equipped with a shunt tripping mechanism, the overcurrent tripping element is not operative (switched shunt tripping).
(✽4) For back-face wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with 30A, or 20A or less.
(✽5) UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products.
(✽6) It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV.
(✽7) In case of DC use, only DC65V is available.
(✽8) Specify if for DC use when ordering.
(✽9) Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.)
(✽10) Connection is male tub terminal only.
(✽11) CP30-BA only.
Remark: 1. Products for non-standard conditions are special order. (Low temperature, 1st and 2nd-degree moisture fungal treatment, corrosion-resistant)
2. Although a buzzing sound may occur when an instantaneous type becomes 80% or more of the rated current for AC use, performance is not effected. Please take this point into
consideration when selecting units for use in quiet environments.
3. Please use in environments free of high temperatures, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact.
Also, do not use it in a circuit with inrush current or harmonics. Problems may result.
37
3. Special-purpose Breakers
Mag Only, DC, and DSN
Fixed NF160-SW/HW
NF250-CW/SW/HW
AC, DC
AC, DC
Rated current x10
2
NF400-CW/SW
AC, DC
NF630-CW/SW
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x4
NF125-SGW/HGW
(AC)
NF160-SGW/HGW AC, DC
High: Rated current x13
NF250-SGW/HGW
Low: Rated current x5.2
(DC)
Adjustable
NF800- SEW AC
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x2
Remark: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C, S
3
NF800- SDW DC High: 8000A Low: 3200A
and H series breakers.
NF1000-SEW High: Rated current x10
AC 2. For more details, contact your dealer.
NF1250-SEW Low: Rated current x2
High: Rated current x10
NF1600-SEW AC
Low: Rated current x2
NF1250-SDW High: 8000A
DC
NF1600-SDW Low: 3200A
Type NF63-SW NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (VDC) 400 440 550 440 550 440 550 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600 500 600
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
2/1 10/5 20/5 20/5 40/40 40/40 40/40 40/20 40/20
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Remark: 1. Time constant: 10ms or below.
• DC side
These breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonard communication failure (Mag-Only breakers can also be
system DC-side breakers. They protect the thyristor used for this purpose). Use these breakers in
from short circuiting when there is a power or combination with fast fuses for even greater protection.
Type NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
Rated voltage (VDC) 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440 250 440
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
15/8 10/5 15/8 20/5 15/8 20/5 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20 20/20
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Instantaneous trip current (min.) 3 times rated current 3 times rated current 3 times rated current 900A 1000A 1400A 2500A 3200A
• DSN switches
These are standard MCCBs without the automatic The appearance, size, drilling plan and available
tripping element. The tripping capacity is about six accessories are all identical to similar standard S and
times the rated current. C Series MCCBs.
Type DSN30- CS DSN63-CW DSN125-CW DSN250-CW DSN400- CW DSN630- CW DSN800- CW
Rated current (A) 30 63 125 250 400 630 800
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Rated voltage (AC/ DC) 460/ — 500/ 250 500/ 250 500/ 250 600/ 250 600/ 250 600/ 250
Max. switching current (AC/ DC) 180/ — 378/155 750/ 310 1500/ 625 2400/ 1000 3780/ 1575 4800/ 2000
Type DSN32-SW DSN63-SW DSN125-SW DSN125-SGW DSN160-SGW DSN250-SW DSN250-SGW DSN400-SW DSN630-SW DSN800-SW DSN1000-SW DSN1250-SW DSN1600-SW
Rated current (A) 32 63 125 125 160 250 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated voltage (AC/ DC) 500/250 500/250 690/250 690/300 690/300 500/250 690/300 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250
Max. switching current (AC/ DC) 192/80 378/155 750/310 750/315 960/400 1500/625 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000 6000/2500 7500/3125 9600/4000
38
3. Special-purpose Breakers
400Hz, Instantaneous, and Generator Protection
400Hz MCCBs
Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 400Hz circuits. • Specifications
When standard MCCBs are used in high-frequency The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,
circuits (eq. 400Hz), the instantaneous characteristics drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the
are shifted higher. The 400Hz MCCB is recommended standard S and H Series breakers of the same
for use in 400Hz circuits. designation.
Type NF125-SW NF125-HW NF250-SW NF250-HW NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW (✽1) NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
16, 20, 32, 16, 20, 32,
125, 150 125, 150 225, 250 200~350 300~500 400~600 600~800 800~1200
Rated current (A) 40, 50, 63, 40, 50, 63, 400, 500
175, 200 175, 200 300, 350 adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
80, 100 80, 100
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
Rated insulation voltage (V ) 690
690V 8/4 10/5 – 5/3 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 10/10 25/13 25/13
Rated breaking capacity 500V 18/9 30/15 15/8 30/8 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 30/30 65/33 65/33
(kA) 440V 25/13 50/25 25/13 50/13 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 42/42 85/43 85/43
IEC 60947- 2 (Icu / Ics) 400V 30/15 50/25 30/15 50/13 45/45 50/50 50/50 50/50 50/50 85/43 85/43
230V 50/25 100/50 50/25 100/25 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 85/85 125/63 125/63
Note (✽1) Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix)
Low-Instantaneous MCCBs
• Low-Inst. MCCBs for Discrimination • Specifications
When a power fuse (PF) is used for high-voltage
proection, make sure that the MCCB on the secondary
side is compatible. PF short-time
PF MCCB tolerance capacity
operating
Type NF125-CW NF125-SW NF250-CW NF250-SW NF400- CW characteristic
Time
Tr1 curve
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3
Low-inst.
MCCBs
50, 63, 80, 16, 20, 32, 40 125, 150, 175 125, 150, 175 250, 300 MCCB 1
Rated current (A)
100, 125 50, 63, 80, 100,125 200, 225, 250 200, 225, 250 350, 400
MCCB 2
Instantaneous trip 600 ● ● ● ● ●
(% of rated Current
current) 400 — — ● ● ● Fig. 4.12 Low-inst. MCCB characteristics
Remark: 1. Ensure compatibility with motor, etc., before use to prevent accidental tripping at start up.
The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity, accessories, etc.,
2. Specify rated current and tripping characteristic.
are all identical to the standard instantaneous trip breakers of the
3. There are no short time delay characteristics.
same designation.
• Specifications
Type NF125-SGW NF125-HGW NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
16-32 16-32
32-63 32-63
125~250 125~250
Rated current (A) 63-100 63-100
adjustable adjustable
75-125 75-125
adjustable adjustable
Instantaneous trip (% of rated current) 300 (✽1)
39
3. Special-purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
Note (✽1) Maximum measurement values for current, voltage, harmonic current, and fault current are displayed in a flashing format when the input exceeds these values. (When a fault occurs, the
cause of the fault and the value for fault current flash despite being less than the maximum measurement value). When electric power exceeds the max. measurement, the value of the
current or voltage flashes.
(✽2) Either overload (L) or short-circuit (SI) is displayed. They are not displayed simultaneously.
(✽3) The pulse output option and CC-Link option cannot be attached at the same time.
(✽4) “Ver.1.10” of CC-link is used when the breaker-mounted MDU is installed.
(✽5) When control power is supplied to the MDU, the max. transitional rush current is 2A peak, 1ms (at 240VAC).
(✽6) The pre-alarm (PAL) output function can be set to “Self-holding” or “Auto-reset”. For the alarm contact output (PAL, OAL) to function, the MDU and circuit breaker must be connected, and
control power must be supplied to the MDU and alarm contact output module.
(✽7) A set of parts (panel holder plate, screws, nuts, MDU connection cable) is included for panel mounting. The standard length for the MDU connection cable is 2m, but it can be specified to
be 0.5m, 3m, or as long as 5m.
40
3. Special-purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
y (DOWN) switch
41
NF250-SW with MDU
Front-Connection
Insulating barrier
Insulating barrier
(removable)
(removable) 105 100
Mounting hole 70 35 92
Mounting hole 4 72
22 M8 bolt
68
(Hex-soket) Breaker Breaker
100
100
24
22
φ8.5
102
165
144
102
165
144
126
126
50
50
37
φ8.5
φ4.5
10
75
23 max.
3
100
100
Neutral 35 35 35
(Bus t max.=7)
pole
90 90
Trip Trip 45 Bus drilling for M4✕0.7 taps
105 MDU
105 30 direct connection or φ5
button button 61
140 MDU
MDU 3-pole 4-pole
terminal
terminal
cover Drilling plan
cover
3-pole 4-pole
26
R1
R1
Connection
144
126
144
52
allowance
37
8
φ8.5
22
20
150
75
φ24
φ4.5
M4✕0.7 35
35 35
15 15 breaker φ24 32.5
30 6 mounting 70
45 71 M4✕0.7 taps 32.5
screw or φ5
MDU φ9 70
61 106 100 100
M8 bolt 105
3-pole 4-pole
Insulating
tube Drilling plan <Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
<Panel mounting>
Space greater than the value
Panel
shown in the figure below 4
thickness
must be secured, and must be 3
1~3.2mm
separate 10cm or more from the 2
Operation/display distribution line. 1
75 R2 72 40
75 L2
side
L1
12
70
Panel
86.5
Control power
90
28.5
1 2 3 4
40
Terminal block
96
85
90
72
M3.5
screw
8.5
58.5 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
30 In case of front connection,
Terminal Control power
M4 screw cover keep space between MDU and
M3 nut
conductor or insulation
54
barrier too.
1 2 3 4 5 6
No transmission FG
Pulse output FG 113 114
42
3. Special-purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
70 6
1~3.2mm distribution line. 5
4
28.5
Panel holder R2 3
75 72 76 2
plate 1
M3 screw
38
86.5
90 L2
L1 Control power
40
Terminal MDU MDU display For the set 1 2 3 4
Upper M3 nut
PE screw(M4) connector part installation
side SLD DG DB DA
218
5 6 7 8
SLD DG DB DA
48
M3
Front panel cutout
85
90
96
screw
104.5
67.5
158
<Breaker mounting>
43.1 Terminal
Terminal
cover
block M3 nut
58.5
Terminal block
23 In case of front connection,
M3 screw
keep space between MDU and
55
conductor or insulation
barrier too. L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
Control power
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG SLD DG DB DA
43
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU
Front-Connection Insulating barrier 94.5
(removable)
112 28 44
Conductor
Mounting hole 56 t max.=8 8
16
51 22
110
Breaker
43
39
Trip
97
button
103
194
102
257
47
φ12.5
51
φ7
75
39
3
PE
12
Current M6 taps
Neutral 44 44
φ14 indication LED 30 44 or φ7
pole
M12 bolt OVER
25 4-pole
MDU 58 PAL 36 3-pole
5 107 φ10.5
terminal MDU 70%
168
cover 90 Conductor t max.=8 Drilling plan
131
185 Conductor drilling for
140 196 155 direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
3-pole 3-pole
Connection M6 taps
allowance or φ7
194
14
225
265
225
20
R6 R6
25 20
26
83
46
128
92
M6 breaker
63
mounting screw 44 φ35 44
10 8
138
φ13 87
87 Insulating 43.5
113 M12 bolt
tube 33
130.5 130.5 37 37
(59)
3-pole 4-pole
118 118
Drilling plan
<Breaker mounting> <Panel mounting>
Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP, NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)
MDU panel mounting MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable. MDU Terminal Figure of the breaker mounting
is removed the terminal cover.
Panel
1 2 3 4
86.5
90
28.5
No transmission
M4 screw Pulse output 113 114
40
Terminal block
85
90
96
72
Type A B
M3.5
screw NF400-SEP 244 205 L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
8.5
NF630-HEP
383 221 barrier.
NF800-HEP 1 2 3 4 5 6
No transmission FG
Pulse output FG 113 114
44
3. Special-purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
8 Breaker
87
97 Dimension of terminal
directly connected to
32
243
103
conductor
275
102
15
51
φ14
φ8
Trip φ8.5
75
8
button
Current 8
87
indication LED
600AF 44
12
OVER 70 M6 taps 70
800AF 46 22
or φ7
32
85 PAL
15
PE 50 30
MDU 40
90
70%
14 210 5 107
Neutral
MDU Conductor t max. 3-pole 4-pole
40 280 pole 131
terminal 600AF t8
φ14 800AF t10
140 cover Drilling plan
M12 bolt 155
210
Conductor drilling for
4-pole direct connection
3-pole
3-pole 3-pole
10
15 Breaker Breaker
8
12.5
243
295
R6 R6
243
40
13
46 46
92
138
10
70
8 70
32
M6 breaker φ48 70 51
φ13 140 51
113 110 140 mounting 6
M12 bolt 210
screw 172
(86)
Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed. CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
70 distribution line. 4
1~3.2mm 3
28.5
2
Panel holder 1
plate 75 R2
72 76
M3 screw
38 L2 Control power
L1
86.5
MDU
90
Terminal M3 nut
A
Upper
PE screw(M4) connector
side 1 2 3 4
40
M3 installation
SLD DG DB DA
85
90
96
104.5
screw
B
67.5
45
4. Connection Method
1. Connection Types The front connection model will be delivered unless otherwise specified. You can convert
the front connection model to other types (excluding the plug-in) by using an appropriate
Table 4-1: Connection Types connection component, which is separately available.
Connection Method (Abbreviation) Front connection (F) Solderless terminal Rear connection (B) Plug-in (PM)
Appearance
2. Connection Accessories 3
Table 4-2: List of Connection Accessories
Type name Solderless terminal (SL) Rear studs (B-ST) Plug-in (PM) (✽1)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P ST-05SW2 PM-05SW2
NF32-SW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW 3P – ST-05SW3 PM-05SW3
NF63-SW/HW 4P ST-05SW4 PM-05SW4
NF125-CW/SW SL-1SW4L (✽3) ST-1SW2 PM-1SW2
4
2P
NF125-HW SL-1SW4G (✽4) ST-1HW2 PM-1HW2
NF125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-CW/SW/HW SL-1SW3L (✽3) PM-1SW3
3P ST-1SW3
NV125-RW SL-1SW3G (✽4) PM-1UW3
SL-1SW4L (✽3)
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P ST-1SW4 PM-1SW4
SL-1SW4G (✽4)
SL-2SW4L (✽5)
NF250-CW/SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW 2P SL-2SW4G (✽6) ST-2SW2 PM-2SW2
SL-2SW3L (✽5)
NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/RW/SEW/HEW SL-2SW3G (✽6) ST-2SW3
3P PM-2SW3
SL-2UW3L (✽5)
NV250-RW ST-2UW3
SL-2UW3G (✽6)
SL-2SW4L (✽5)
NF250-SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW 4P ST-2SW4 PM-2SW4
SL-2SW4G (✽6)
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW PM-2GSWIP2 (✽2)
2P SL-2GSW4 ST-2GSW2
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW PM-2GUW2
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW PM-2GSWIP3 (✽2)
3P SL-2GSW3 ST-2GSW3
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW PM-2GUW3
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW PM-2GSWIP4 (✽2)
4P SL-2GSW4 ST-2GSW4
NF250-UGW, NF125-UGW –
NF400-CW/SW 2P – ST-4SW2 PM-4SW2
NF400-CW/SW/SEW, NV400-CW/SW/SEW 3P
– ST-4SW3 PM-4SW3
NF400-HEW/REW, NV400-HEW/REW 3P
NF400-SW/SEW, NV400-SEW 4P
– ST-4SW4 PM-4SW4
NF400-HEW, NV400-HEW 4P
NF630-CW/SW 2P – ST-6SW2 –
NF630-CW/SW/SEW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW 3P
– ST-6SW3 –
NF630-HEW/REW, NV630-HEW 3P
NF630-SW/SEW, NV630-SEW 4P
– ST-6SW4 –
NF630-HEW 4P
NF800-SDW 2P – ST-8SW2 PM-8SW2
NF800-CEW/SEW, NV800-SEW 3P
– ST-8SW3 PM-8SW3
NF800-HEW/REW, NV800-HEW 3P
NF800-SEW 4P
– ST-8SW4 PM-8SW4
NF800-HEW 4P
Note (✽1) You can use the plug-in terminal unit (PM) when the wiring of terminal units is required in advance, and the delivery of both the main body and the components at the same time,
which is normal, is not allowed. Furthermore specify the non-use of plug-in terminal (PM-N) for the connection of circuit breaker.
(✽2) If safety device is necessary, please order.
(✽3) Connected wire size: 2.5~25mm2
(✽4) Connected wire size: 25~70mm2 Line Load
(✽5) Connected wire size: 14~95mm2
(✽6) Connected wire size: 70~125mm2
46
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
1. Accessories
Table 5-1: Accessories
Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type accessories
AL Alarm switch Electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker. NF-C·S·H·U,
NV-C·S·H·U
●
AX Auxiliary switch Electrically indicates the ON-OFF status of the circuit breaker. and MB series
●
Electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote distance. Permissible NF-C·S·H·U
SHT Shunt trip working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or 70 to 125%
of the DC rated voltage.
and MB series ●
Automatically trips the circuit breaker if the voltage is lowered. Working NF-C·S·H·U, (✽1)
UVT Undervoltage trip voltages are 70 to 35% of the UVT rated voltage. When the voltage
recovers to 85% or higher, you can reset the device and restart operation.
NV-C·S·H·U
and MB series
●
MG Insulation switch
Enables measurement of insulation resistance between the terminals of the
load while circuit breaker is turned OFF.
NV-C·S·H·U –
PAL Pre-alarm module Indicates that the load current exceeds the pre-alarm setting current. Electronic type –
Electronic type
OAL Overcurrent trip alarm switch Indicates that the breaker has been tripped by overcurrent or short-circuit current.
(SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW) –
ON MG switch (closed)
47
3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT Cassette-type accessories
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction
Table 5-8: Combinations of Accessories
Series NF-C · S · H · U, MB NV-C · S · H · U
NF32-SW(3P)
NF63-CW/SW/HW(3P)
NF125-CW(3P), NF125-SW(3P, 4P)
NF125-HW, NF125-SGW/HGW NV32-SW
NF125-RGW/UGW NV63-CW/SW/HW
NF32-SW
NF30-CS NF160-SW/SGW/HW/HGW NV125-CW/SW/HW
Type NF63-CW/SW/HW NV30-CS
MB30-CS NF250-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW
NF250-SGW/HGW NV250-SEW/HEW
NF250-RGW/UGW NV125-RW, NV250-RW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
MB100-SW, MB225-SW
Poles 2, 3 2 2, 3, 4 3 3, 4
(✽7) (✽7)
AL 1 2
(✽7) (✽7)
AX 1 2
(✽2)
AL + SHT or UVT 5
(✽2)
AX + SHT or UVT
(✽1)
(✽2)
Accessories AL + AX + SHT or UVT
MG
(Note 7)
AL + MG
AX + MG
(✽5)
(✽8)
EAL
(✽8)
(✽9)
TBM
PAL
NF400-CW/SW NF1000-SEW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SDW NF1250-SEW
Type NF630-CW/SW NF800-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SEW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW NF1250-SDW
NF400-UEW (3P) NF1600-SDW
Poles 2, 3, 4
Switch type S V
(✽3)
AL
(✽3)
1 3 1 5 3 1 3
AX 2 4
2 4 2 6 4 5 6
(✽3) (✽3)
AL + AX
PAL
(contact output)
Option for NF1000-SEW
Option for NF400- SEW/ HEW/ REW/ UEW (3P) Option for NF400-UEW (4P) NF1250-SEW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW NF1600-SEW
Circled numbers indicate the order of installation.
Note (✽1) SHT and UVT are right-pole mounting as standard. Please specify if left-pole mounting is required.
(✽2) UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).
(✽3) When mounting more than three left- pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special type SLT is necessar y.
(✽4) When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX, or AL + AX, the UVT voltage module is separate.
(✽5) SLT- equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100~200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker ’s right pole.)
49
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT Cassette-type accessories
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting MG EAL TBL PAL TBM Lead wire direction
Series NV-C · S · H
NV400-CW/SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
Type NV800-SEW/HEW
NV630-CW/SW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Poles 3, 4
Switch type S
(✽2)
AL
(✽2)
AX
(✽1) (✽1)
SHT or UVT
AL + AX
(✽2) (✽2)
5
(✽1) (✽1)
(✽2) (✽2)
(✽3) (✽3)
Accessories AL + SHT or UVT
(✽1) (✽1)
(✽2) (✽2)
(✽3) (✽3)
AX + SHT or UVT
(✽1) (✽1)
(✽2) (✽2)
(✽3) (✽3)
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
MG
AL + MG
Note (✽1) UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).
(✽2) When mounting more than three left- pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special type SLT is necessar y.
(✽3) When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX. the UVT voltage module is separate.
50
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
Series NV-C · S · H
NV400-CW/SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
Type NV800-SEW/HEW
NV630-CW/SW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Poles 3, 4
Switch type S
AX + MG
AL + AX + MG
EAL
Accessories
TBL
TBM
(✽1) (✽1)
Note (✽1) SLT- equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100- 200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker’ s right pole.)
Remark: 1. EAL, TBL, and TBM can be mounted regardless of the number of AL, AX, SHT, UVT and MG accessories. (However, two EALs, TBLs or TBMs cannot be mounted simultaneously.)
2. The PAL’ s dimensions and specifications change for the NF- C/ S and NV- C/ S series.
51
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT Cassette-type accessories
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting TBM Lead wire direction
NV32-SW
NV63-CW/SW/HW
Type NV125-CW/SW/HW
NV250-CW/SW/HW
NV125-RW, NV250-RW
Poles 3, 4
AL
AX
(✽1)
AL + AX
(✽2)
(✽3)
SHT or UVT
5
AL + SHT or UVT
AX + SHT or UVT
MG
AL + MG
AX + MG
EAL
(✽4)
TBM
PAL
52
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
Switch type S
(✽2)
AL
(✽2)
AX
(✽1) (✽1)
SHT or UVT
(✽2) (✽2)
AL + AX
(✽1) (✽1)
(✽2) (✽2)
(✽3) (✽3)
Accessories AL + SHT or UVT
(✽1) (✽1)
(✽2) (✽2)
(✽3) (✽3)
AX + SHT or UVT
(✽1) (✽1)
(✽2) (✽2)
(✽3) (✽3)
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
TBM
(✽4) (✽4)
Note (✽1) UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module).
(✽2) When mounting more than three left- pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special- order SLT is necessary.
(✽3) When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX. the UVT voltage module is separate.
(✽4) SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100-200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted ti the breaker’s right pole.)
Remark: 1. TBM can be mounted regardless of the number of AL, AX, SHT, UVT accessories. (However, two TBMs cannot be mounted simultaneously.)
2. The PAL’ s dimensions and specifications change for the NF- C/ S and NV- C/ S series.
53
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT
Left-side Right-side
mounting mounting
Poles 2 3 3
Switch type S S
(✽5)
AL
1 2 1 2 1 2
(✽5)
AX 1 3 1 5 3
1 2 1 2 1 2
2 4 2 6 4
SHT
or
UVT
AL + SHT or UVT
1 3 1
3
2 4 2
54
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
AC100-120
1000 • 1250 • 1600 Frame 200-240
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW 380-450 200 70 7~15
NF1600-SEW/SDW (50 also 60Hz)
DC100
Note (✽1) Secure a sufficient input power so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage).
(✽2) The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open.
NF-C • S • H • U
MB – ● – – ● – ● – ● – – – ● –
32(30) • 63A Frame 125A Frame 160 • 250A Frame
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW – – – ● ● – – – – – – – – ●
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV800-SEW/HEW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
● – ● – ● ● – ● – ● ● ● – –
NF1600-SEW/SDW
(✽3) Time-delayed types can be produced. Details will be available upon request.
(✽4) Compatible to 50 and 60Hz UVT Voltage Module Wiring Diagram
(✽5) Rated voltage differs according to make and country of manufacture.Please consult your dealer.
(Lead-Wire Connection)
55
6. Test Button Module (TBM)
● Press the test button on the main body of the breaker while control
voltage is applied to test the unit. (The voltage must be applied to the
main body of the breaker for more than 2 sec when testing time-
delayed NV models.
● All models have a vertical lead terminal unit (SLT) as standard.
Table 5-12 18
Series NV-C • S • H • U
Compatible with
Input rated
AC100-240/ TBM2
control
DC100-240 TBM1
voltage (V)
(DC24) (✽1)
92 (Terminal
cover)
10.5
Input control 1VA or less
power (VA)
12.5
7. Lead-wire Specifications
Table 5-13
56
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
10.5
NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU 7 29 54 29
NF125-HGW, NF225-HGW 25 25 54 25
10.5
NF-SFW,NF-SJW, NF-HJW 25 35 54 35
86.5
25
8
13.5
10.5
25
7
A C
12.5
8
E
13.5
– 35 154
NF1600-SEW/SDW
9
41
A 75
57
10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL)
This module gives an alarm when the load problems before they occur. Electronic breakers
current exceeds a preset current level, securing a equipped with a digital ETR of 125 to 1600AF are
continuous power supply and preventing optional (standard for some modules).
Table 5-17
Pre- alarm LED Solid-state relay (SSR) output- Pre- alarm module- contact output (1a)
Type
(Auto reset) contact output (Auto reset) Switching capacity (Self- holding) Switching capacity Reset system
NF125-SGW/HGW
24VDC 100- 200VAC
NF160-SGW/HGW Option
20mA
NF250-SGW/HGW
NV250-SEW/HEW —
NF400- SE W NF400- HE W NF400- RE W 100VAC or Press the reset switch or
NF400- UE W NF630- SE W NF630- HE W Standard equipment Option
200VAC 2A turn off control power.
NF630- RE W NF800- CE W NF800- SE W
NF800- HE W NF800- RE W NF800- UE W 24VDC 100- 200VAC
Option
NV400- SE W NV400- HE W NV400- RE W 20mA
NV630- SE W NV630- HE W NV800- SE W
NV800- HE W
NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
Pre-alarm LED The LED on the circuit breaker starts flashing when load current exceeds the preset current, then changes to a continuous display
when the pre-alarm output is given.
Solid-state relay output Open the upper cover of the circuit breaker, connect the lead-wire connector supplied, and use it as the lead wire outlet. In this
case, only the lead wire outlet of the internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (For flush-plate models, the outlet is
already installed as a PAL mount.)
Pre-alarm module SLT is attached as standard and is used as the control power source of for 100VAC and 200VAC. In this case, no other internal
accessories can be attached to the right pole. (Auto resetting is also possible.)
•Pre-alarm characteristics
5h
10h
5h
Pre-alarm pick-up current
5
2h 2h
Pre-alarm pick-up current
1h 1h
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min LTD operating time TL
6min LTD operating time TL 6min 12-60-100-150s ± 20%
4min 60-80-100s ± 20% 4min (at 200%)
Operating time
Operating time
(at 200%)
2min 2min
1min 1min
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s Pre-alarm
Pre-alarm
5s pickup current Ip
5s pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75 In x(0.7-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10% 2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10%
2s
-0.95-1.0) -0.95-1.0)
1s Pre-alarm 1s Pre-alarm
operatiing time Tp 0.5s operatiing time Tp
0.5s
Tp= TL ± 20%
Tp= TL ± 20% 2
0.2s 2 0.2s (at 200%)
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500
Current Current
Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating
(NF/NV125,250AF) NF/NV400,630,800AF
NF1000,1250,1600AF
58
5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
Table 5-18
Phase/ wire type 3 ø 4W
Rated voltage VAC 415
Usable supply voltage VAC 304~484
Usable voltage (line voltage) VAC 380 400 415 440
Total operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (135% of total phase voltage) VAC 296 312 323 343
Tripping
Total non- operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (120% of total phase voltage) VAC 263 277 288 305
characteristics
Total overvoltage operating time (s) 1
Overvoltage non- operating time (s) More than 0.1
Trip indication method Button
Reset method Reset button (open- phase display use)
1c
AC DC
c os ø L/ R
Voltage Voltage
External output contacts 1.0 0.4 0 0.007
100, 120V 7A 7A 30V 7A 6A
200, 240V 7A 7A 125V 0.6A 0.6A
415V 5A 2A 250V 0.3A 0.3A
Remark: Using with a shunt- trip device (SHT) equipped breaker will improve tripping and phase protection.
Test button
52
Operation display
68
20
60
83
109
(reset button)
92.5
Current switch
74
52 52
11.5
59
5. Accessories
External Accessories
Note: For under 250AF, use a 35mm padlock (under 70g). Where F-RCS is not used Release knob Where F-RCS is used (sealed) F-RCS
For under 400AF, use a 40mm padlock (under 100g).
Note: For applicable lock devices, please refer to page 63.
60
5. Accessories
External Accessories
D
D
90 90
E
P
IP
TR
Center of circuit f f
Center of
104
78
78
breaker and
operating
O FF
operating handle
T
handle
SE
RE
16 78 4-f 12 78 4-f 12
Plate thickness (1.2 to 3.2)
58
(d) (e)
35 A±2
104
Circuit Breaker Mounting-Hole Drilling Dimension Drawing Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
H
Center of circuit Hinge (left) Hinge (right)
C
breaker and
C
Circuit breaker
operating handle
D
X1 X2
Center of
B B B operating handle
* The above drawing shows a layout of the
Either M4 × 0.7 Either M4 × 0.7 Either M4 × 0.7 hinge and the circuit breaker when viewed
screw or f 5 screw or f 5 screw or f 5
from the load side.
(a) (b) (c)
■Summary of Dimensions
Table 5-19
Applicable models (✽1) Dimensions (mm)
Drilling
Type names ELCB/MCCB with ground
MCCB plans A B C D E
Number of poles fault protection Number of poles
NF32-SW, NF63-CW,
NF63-SW, NF63-HW
F-05S2, F-05SE2 (✽4) 2 — — (a) (d) 12.5
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW,
DSN63-SW
NF32-SW, NF63-CW,
NF63-SW, NF63-HW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW,
F-05S, F-05SE 3, 4 2, 3 (b) (d) 25
MB50-SW, NV63-SW, NV63-HW
111 — —
DSN32-SW, 105
DSN63-CW, DSN63-SW
NF125-CW, NF125-SW,
F-1S2, F-1SE2 (✽4) 2 — — (a) (d) 15
DSN125-CW, DSN125-SW
NF125-CW, NF125-SW,
MB100-SW, 3, 4 NV125-CW, NV125-SW,
F-1S, F-1SE 3, 4 (b) (d)
DSN125-CW, DSN125-SW NV125-HW 30
NF125-HW 2, 3, 4
F-1U, F-1UE — — NV125-RW 3 (c) (e) 172 30.5 86
NF250-CW, NF250-SW,
NV250-CW, NV250-SW,
NF250-HW,
F-2S, F-2SE 2, 3, 4 NV250-HW, NV250-SEW, 3, 4 (b) (d) 126 — —
MB225-SW, 107
NV250-HEW
DSN250-CW, DSN250-SW
F-2U, F-2UE — — NV250-RW 3 (c) (e) 201 37.5 100.5
NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW,
35
NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW,
F-2SG, F-2SGE NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW, 2, 3, 4 — — (b) (d) 126 — —
DSN125-SGW, DSN160-SGW, 125
DSN250-SGW
NF125-RGW, NF125-UGW,
F-2UG, F-2UGE 2, 3, 4 — — (c) (e) 201 37.5 100.5
NF250-RGW, NF250-UGW
F-05SUL2 2 — — (a) (d) 12.5
NF50-SWU
F-05SUL 3 NV50-SWU 3 (b) (d) 25
105 111
F-1SUL2 2 — — (a) (d) 15
NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU — —
F-1SUL 3 NV100-SWU 3 30
F-2SUL NF225-CWU 3 NV225-CWU 3 (b) (d) 107
35 126
F-2SGUL NF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW 3 — — 125
Note (✽1) As for applicable models other than those mentioned above, please contact us.
(✽2) Shows dimensions for front connection and rear connection types. For plug-in types, the reference surface changes.
(✽3) 4-pole plug-in type is a special type. For details, please contact us.
(✽4) When using with a terminal cover, please specify “F” at the end of terminal cover model name. (Special type terminal cover for operating handle with screws.)
61
■ Outside Dimension Drawing 400~800A Frame
Outside Dimension Drawing Front Plate Drilling Dimension Drawing
Center of circuit breaker
Decorated plate Front plate Packing and operating handle
Center of
TR
IP
PE
D
ON
circuit breaker
D
18
f1
150
OFF
Center of
112
ET
RES
operating
handle
Interlock
83 release screw Plate thickness (1.2 to 3.2) 112 4-f15
150 41 A±2
Circuit Breaker Mounting-Hole Drilling Dimension Drawing Front plate Operating handle
Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
Center of circuit breaker handle
Left hinge Right hinge
H
H
Circuit breaker
H X1 H X2
(a) (a) Hinge (left) Circuit breaker Hinge (right)
Center of 0 or (5H+85) 0 or (4H+120)
more or more more or more
C
■ Summary of Dimensions
Table 5-20
Applicable models (✽1) Dimensions (mm)
Type names ELCB/MCCB with ground
MCCB A (✽2) B C D
Number of poles fault protection Number of poles
NF400-CW, NF400-SW,
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW,
NF400-REW, NV400-CW, NV400-SW,
F-4S, F-4SE
DSN400-CW,
DSN400-SW,
NF630-CW, NF630-SW,
2, 3, 4
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW,
NV400-REW,
NV630-CW, NV630-SW,
3, 4 183 44 194 0 5
NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
NF630-REW,
DSN630-CW, DSN630-SW
F-4U, F-4UE NF400-UEW 3 — — 280 44 234 20
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW,
NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW,
F-8S, F-8SE NF800-REW, 2, 3, 4 NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW 3 183 70 243 0
DSN800-SW
NF800-UEW,
F-8U, F-8UE NF400-UEW(4P) 3, 4 — — 280 70 290 23.5
F-4SUL NF-SKW 3 NV-SKW 3 183 44 194 0
F-6SUL NF-SLW 3 — — 183 70 243 0
Note (✽1) As for applicable models other than those mentioned above, please contact us.
(✽2) Shows dimensions for front connection types. For rear connection and plug-in types, the reference surface changes.
D ON
H X1 H X2
RIEP
TP
● Includes
(a)
as standard a safety device which
● Drilling plan Breaker
H
X1 X2
11
D
112
single padlock (35mm, 40mm) is used. The figure above shows the relationship
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with IEC (Y) (X)
between the hinge and breaker viewed
60529): IP3X (IP5X with dustproof packing). 112 (b) C
E
(c) from the load side of the breaker.
Table 5-21
Fig Dimensions (mm)
Type Breaker type Number of poles (✽5) Mounting
External Drilling crews
dimensions plan A B C D E F
Release part
Operating
section
Operation Lock
This complies with OFF lock specifications. To set the
operation lock in the OFF position: (For example, in the case of
a padlock) Warning mark Joint clamp screw
M5 × 10 (4 pcs)
qTurn the handle in the Reset direction to a position at Tightening torque: 2.5 to 3.5N•m
which the marks on the lock plate and on the case are
aligned.
wPush the lock plate in.
eWhile pushing the lock plate, return the handle to the
OFF position. Operation Lock Devices
rLock by passing the
padlock through the hole Case mark (1) Padlock
in the center of the e B
q
handle. C
Padlock Dimensions
Three padlocks (35/40mm) Use commercially available padlocks. (mm)
r Applicable
which are commercially Handle model
A (Nominal size) B C
w
available can be installed. Lock plate
35 19 5
All models
Note: For 400~800AF, step Padlock 40 22 or 23 5.5
e is not required. A
Dimension C: Maximum 8mm.
63
■ Outside Dimension Drawing 250A Frame or Smaller
54
54
ON
Center of
ED
operating
P
IP
TR
handle
f
f
54 Center of 54
54
54
90
operating
OFF
K
K X
Plate
thickness 0 or more (5K + 100) or more
16 1.2 to 3.2 Hinge (left) Hinge (right)
* The right drawing shows a
48 A B
layout of the hinge and the
90 circuit breaker when viewed Circuit breaker
54 C (fixed type) ±2
from the load side.
D (adjustable type) ±2 X X
Circuit Breaker Mounting-Hole Drilling Drawing Center of circuit breaker Center of circuit
and circuit breaker handle breaker handle Center of circuit breaker
Center of
Center of circuit Center of Center of circuit breaker Center of circuit Center of circuit breaker Center of
breaker handle circuit breaker and circuit breaker handle breaker handle circuit breaker circuit breaker
Circuit breaker
H
Center of circuit
F
G
G
breaker and
F
operating handle
■ Summary of Dimensions
5
Table 5-22
Applicable models (✽1) Dimension (mm)
Drilling
Type names ELCB/MCCB with ground Fixed type Adjustable type (✽2)
MCCB plans A B E F G H
Number of poles fault protection Number of poles C D (min.) D (max.)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW,
NF63-SW, NF63-HW,
V-05S2, V-05SE2 (✽3) 2 — — (a) (f) — — 12.5
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW,
DSN63-SW
NF32-SW, NF63-CW,
NF63-SW, NF63-HW,
NV32-SW, NV63-CW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW, 3 2, 3 (b) (f)
V-05S, V-05SE NV63-SW, NV63-HW 162 300 25
MB50-SW,
DSN32-SW, 111 — —
DSN63-CW, DSN63-SW 4 — — (c) (f) 39
NF125-CW, NF125-SW,
V-1S2, V-1SE2 (✽3) 2 — — (a) (f) — — 15
DSN125-CW, DSN125-SW
NF125-CW, NF125-SW,
3 NV125-CW, NV125-SW, 3 (b) (f)
MB100-SW,
NV125-HW
V-1S, V-1SE DSN125-CW, DSN125-SW 4 4 (c) (f)
61 125
2, 3 (b) (f) 30
NF125-HW — —
4 (c) (f)
NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW 41 35
2, 3 (b) (f)
NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW
V-2SG, V-2SGE NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW — — 126 — —
DSN125-SGW, DSN160-SGW 4 (c) (f) 79 143 180 318
DSN250-SGW
NF125-RGW, NF125-UGW 2, 3 (d) (g)
V-2UG, V-2UGE — — 201 37.5 100.5
NF250-RGW, NF250-UGW 4 (e) (g)
V-05SUL2 2 — — (a) (f) — — 12.5
NF50-SWU
V-05SUL 3 NV50-SWU 3 (b) (f) 162 300 25
39 111
V-1SUL2 2 — — (a) (f) 61 125 — — 15
NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU — —
V-1SUL 3 NV100-SWU 3 30
162 300
V-2SUL NF225-CWU 3 NV225-CWU 3 (b) (f)
41 35 126
V-2SGUL NF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW 3 — — 79 143 180 318
Note (✽1) As for applicable models other than those mentioned above, please contact us.
(✽2) As for the adjustable type, the dimensions shown above are those when the adjustment unit V-AD3S separately available is mounted.
(✽3) When using with a terminal cover, please specify “F” at the end of terminal cover model name. (Special type terminal cover for operating handle with screws.)
Remark: 1. Shows dimensions for front connection and rear connection types. For plug-in types, please contact us. 64
5. Accessories
External Accessories
Center of
ON
circuit
P PE
D breaker
I
TR
F
140
B
OF F
Center of
104
operating
T
SE
RE
handle
f6
Plate 3
thickness
140 1.2 to 3.2 76 C 104
62 D (fixed type)±2
E (adjustable type)±2
H
H
H X
Center of
circuit breaker Hinge (left) Circuit breaker Hinge (right)
and operating 0 or more (8H + 150) or more
G
handle
X X
■ Summary of Dimensions
Table 5-23
Applicable models (✽1) Dimension (mm)
Type names ELCB/MCCB with ground Fixed type Adjustable type (✽2)
MCCB fault protection A B C F G J
Number of poles Number of poles D E (min.) E (max.)
NF400-CW, NF400-SW,
NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NV400-CW, NV400-SW,
NF400-REW, DSN400-CW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW,
DSN400-SW, NV400-REW,
V-4S, V-4SE 2, 3, 4 3, 4 140 257 97 191 233 300 0 194 44
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NV400-NCW,
NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NV630-CW, NV630-SW,
NF630-REW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
DSN630-CW, DSN630-SW
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW,
NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW,
V-8S, V-8SE 2, 3, 4 NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW 3 210 275 97 191 233 300 0 243 70
NF800-REW,
DSN800-SW
V-4SUL NF-SKW 3 NV-SKW 3 140 257 97 191 233 300 0 194 44
V-6SUL NF-SLW 3 — — 210 275 97 191 233 300 0 243 70
Note (✽1) As for applicable models other than those mentioned above, please contact us.
(✽2) As for the adjustable type, the dimensions shown above are those when the adjustment unit V-AD3L separately available is mounted.
Remark: 1. Shows dimensions for front connection types. For rear connection types, the reference surface changes. For plug-in types, please contact us.
65
In the circumstances where safety of machinery is emphasized, this operating handle is effective for the
emergency stop use in accordance to provisions of IEC 60204-1, EN 60204-1, NFPA79, and JIS B 9960-1.
The operating handle is colored in accordance with the applicable standard (handle in red and the
surrounding part in yellow).
The type name consists of “E” added to the type name of the standard operating handle.
■ Operating Handles
The basic type (standard) for the F-type operating handle includes OFF-lock/reset open/mounting on power source.
When ordering specifications other than those mentioned above, designate the specifications in symbols together
with the basic type name. The V-type operating handle is available only in the basic type (standard).
Required specifications
Basic type name
Operation lock Door open Installation direction
F-05S2 LF DR Y
For emergency
For general use
stop use
F-05S2 F-05SE2
F-05S F-05SE Symbol Specifications Symbol Specifications Symbol Specifications
F-1S2 F-1SE2 LF OFF-lock DR Reset open Power supply
Blank
F-1S F-1SE LN ON/OFF lock DF OFF open (upper)
F-1U F-1UE Power supply
General F-2S F-2SE Y
(left)
products F-2SG F-2SGE
F-2UG F-2UGE Power supply
Z
F-4S F-4SE (right)
F-type
F-4U F-4UE
F-8S F-8SE Note: As for the UL
F-8U F-8UE
listed products,
F-05SUL2
F-05SUL only the
F-1SUL2 specification of
UL listed F-1SUL “mounting on
product F-2SUL power source”
F-2SGUL
is available.
F-4SUL
F-6SUL
V-05S2 V-05SE2
V-05S V-05SE
V-1S2 V-1SE2
V-1S V-1SE
General V-1U V-1UE
products V-2S V-2SE
V-2SG V-2SGE
V-2UG V-2UGE
V-type
V-4S V-4SE
V-8S V-8SE
V-05SUL2
V-05SUL
V-1SUL2
UL listed V-1SUL
product V-2SUL
V-2SGUL
V-4SUL
V-6SUL
70
41.5±4
Max. 95
(✽3)
47 Deviation
ON 70 of 4mm
IP
or less
R
Clasp ø12
OFF T
(✽1)
114
Front plate deviation of 4mm or less
Center of the circuit breaker
Max. 115
100 or more (210 or more
● The handle can be locked at either ON or operating handle
when the hinge is on the left)
(✽3)
OFF position. (Three padlocks (35mm,
80
17 43.5±4 Front plate thickness 1.2–3.2
40mm) can be installed. Off-position lock only Clasp
(✽1)
specifications are also acceptable.) (✽2) Hinge
(✽2) C±2
● Digrees of protection (IEC 60529) IP5X 45
B±2
A±2
Remark: 1. Trip action can be displayed when the circuit 34 40 110 Clasp
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected (option)
(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
Reference plane for mounting
Table 5-24: Summary of Dimensions the circuit breaker
Dimensions (mm)
Type name Applicable models
A (✽4) B (✽4) C (✽4)
S05SW NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
87 102 104.5
S1SW NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW (✽5)
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW
S2SW 95 110 112.5
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW, NV250-RW (✽5)
S2GSW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW 113 128 130.5
Note (✽1) The clasps are not supplied standardly, and should be prepared by users Details on dimensions and others will be available upon request. Remark: 1. Reset open-type
(✽2) When the optional clasp is used. 2. These are not suitable for isolation.
(✽3) The tolerance from the center of ø62 is shown.
(✽4) The dimensions of the front-face type are shown. Some of the back-face and plug-in types have a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker.
(✽5) The front plate drilling dimensions for the U series differ from those shown above. Please consult us for their details.
● Appearance (Color N1.5) ● External dimensions ● Drilling plan 4- 5.5
Centre of
Front panel Operating plate 62 breaker
D
max. 150
84
Decorative plate 35 ± 5
45
(✽3)
ON
IP 84
TR (✽1) 12
114
Retainer (✽5)
OFF
Deviation: 2 mm or less
max. 145
130(S4CP·S4SP)
(✽2)
A±2
Table 5-25
Fig Dimensions (mm)
Type Breaker type External Drilling plan A (✽4) B (✽4) C (✽4) D
dimensions
S4CW (✽5) NF400-CW, NV400-CW a b 140 156 — 0
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 162 178 — 0
S4SW (✽5) NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV800-SEW/HEW a b
NF400-UEW (3P) 259 275 — 20
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW 259 275 — 23.5
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
S10SW a b 199 215 — 0
NF1600-SEW/SDW
Note (✽1) Retainers are not included. They must be provided by the customer. Remark: 1. Reset open-type
(✽2) When using optional retainer.
(✽3) Shows the tolerance for the distance from the center of a 62mm dia. hole.
(✽4) The figures show the front-connection dimensions. Some rear-connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for mounting purposes.
(✽5) S4CW and S4SW are for isolation purposes. (Specify OFF lock only.) The tolerance is less than 5mm. It does not conform to isolation purposes, however, if the deviation is more than 2mm.
●Surface plate interlocking fastening (separately available)
Operation Breaker type Dimensions (mm)
handle series Type Drilling diagram and referential diagram
MCCB ELCB A B
NF32-SW NV32-SW
NF63-CW/SW/HW NV63-CW/SW/HW Fastening ON
NF125-CW/SW/HW NV125-CW/SW/HW
MB100-SW
TG-S1UW (✽1) NF125-RGW/UGW NV125-RW
NF160-SW/HW
TG-S2SW (✽1) NF250-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW – –
NF250-SEW/HEW,MB225-SW NV250-SEW/HEW
Fastening ON
NF125-SGW/HGW
S-type NF160-SGW/HGW
TG-S2GSW (✽1) NF250-SGW/HGW
–
Center of the
NF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW handle of breaker Breaker
TG-S4CW NF400-CW NV400-CW
Center of
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW the breaker
TG-S4SW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW 67 119
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW
16 A
Ordering information
V – 1 S UL E 2 F – 1 S UL E 2 LF DR Y
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1) V : V-type Operating handle 1) F : F-type Operating handle
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, 2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW,
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW,
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW, 1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW,
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, 2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
MB225-SW, MB225-SW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW,
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW, NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW, DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW,
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, 4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN400-CW/SW, DSN400-CW/SW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-UEW
DSN630-CW/SW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW DSN630-CW/SW,
8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW, DSN800-CW/SW 8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW,
3) S : Series name S indicate WSS C, S and H series NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-UEW(4P),
U indicate WSS RW/UEW/RGW/UGW NF800-UEW, DSN800-CW/SW
SG indicate SGW/HGW 3) S : Series name S indicate WSS C, S and H series
4) UL : Type of breaker Blank······ General product U indicate WSS RW/UEW/RGW/UGW
UL·········· UL Listed product SG indicate SGW/HGW
5) E : For emergency Blank······ For general 4) UL : Type of breaker Blank······ General product
E············ For emergency UL·········· UL Listed product
6) 2 : Number of poles Blank······ 3 pole and 4 pole 5) E : For emergency Blank······ For general
2············ 2 pole E············ For emergency
6) 2 : Number of poles Blank······ 3 pole and 4 pole
2············ 2 pole
S 1 SW A 7) A : Handle lock position LN···········ON/OFF position lock
LF············OFF position lock only
1) 2) 3) 4)
8) R : Door open position DF·········· OFF position open
1) S : Operating handle type DR·········· RESET position open
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker 05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, 9) Y : Mounting direction Blank······ Vertically type
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, (ON side of breaker is upper)
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW, Y············ Horizontally type
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW (ON side of breaker is left)
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW, Z············ Horizontally type
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, (ON side of breaker is right)
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
MB225-SW,
F 10 SW 4P
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW, 1) 2) 3) 4)
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW 1) F : Operating handle type
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW, 2) 10 : Frame size of breaker 10··········· NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW,
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW, NF1600-SEW/SDW
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW 3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, 4) 4P : Number of poles Blank······ 2 pole and 3 pole
DSN400-CW/SW, 4P·········· 4 pole
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NF400-UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN630-CW/SW, DSN800-CW/SW,
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-UEW(4P)
NF630-UEW, NF800-UEW
3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
CW indicate WSS 400A frame C series
4) A : Handle lock position Blank······ ON/OFF position lock
A············ OFF position lock only
S 10 SW
1) 2) 3)
1) S : Operating handle type
2) 10 : Frame size of breaker 10···········NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD,
NF1600-SS/SSD, NF1250-UR
3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS
69
4. Terminal Cover
Table 5-26
Large terminal cover Small terminal cover Transparent terminal Rear terminal cover Plug-in terminal cover
(TC-L) (TC-S) cover (TTC) (BTC) (PTC)
Breaker type A A A A A
B
C
B
B
C
B
C
B
C
C
Note (✽1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of model designation for models with F-type operating handle. (Those are F-type operating-handle dedicated models,
and screws are used for fixing.)
(✽2) An F-type operating handle can be installed.
Remark: 1. Parenthesized numbers denote the outside dimensions (A×B×C in mm).
2. The terminal cover for a four-pole model can be produced upon request.
Table 5-27
5
Large terminal cover Transparent terminal cover Rear terminal cover Plug- in terminal cover
(TC- L) (TTC) (BTC) (PTC)
A
Breaker type B
C Fig.1
A A A
B B
B
C C
A C
B
C Fig.2
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW (✽3)
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW TCL- 4SW3 TTC- 4SW3 BTC- 4SW3 PTC- 4SW3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW 2P, 3P (171✕99.5✕110) (171✕104.5✕110) (140✕99.5✕42) (140✕99.5✕42)
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW Fig. 1
(✽1) (✽1)
TCL- 4SW3 BTC- 4SW3
NF400-UEW 3P — (140✕132.5/ 196.5✕42) —
(171✕132.5/ 196.5✕110)
(✽1) (✽1)
TCL- 8UW3 BTC- 8SW3 (✽2)
NF800-UEW 3P — —
(220✕146/ 194.5✕155) (210✕146/ 194.5✕32)
(✽1) (✽1)
TCL- 8UW4 BTC- 8SW4 (✽2)
NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW 4P — —
(290✕146/ 194.5✕155) (280✕146/ 194.5✕32)
NF1000-SEW TCL-10SW3
2P, 3P — — —
NF1250-SEW/SDW (220✕139✕150)
NF1000-SEW TCL-10SW4
4P — — —
NF1250-SEW/SDW (290✕139✕150)
70
5. Accessories
External Accessories
Table 5-30
NF- C series NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW — NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW —
NF400-SW NF1000-SEW NF400-SW NF1000-SEW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW NF1250-SEW NF400-SEW/HEW/REW NF1250-SEW
MCCB NF- S·H series NF630-SW NF1250-SDW NF630-SW NF1250-SDW
type NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SEW NF630-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SEW
NF800-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SDW NF800-SEW/HEW/REW NF1600-SDW
Operating DC 100/ 110V 3.0 (8.0) 4.0 (8.0) 1.0 (3.0) 8 1.0 (3.0) 9
current
(A, rms) 100/ 110V 4.0 (8.0) 5.0 (10.0) 1.0 (3.0) 10 1.0 (3.0) 10
AC
(✽1) 200/ 220V 2.0 (4.5) 3.5 (7.0) 0.5 (1.5) 8 0.5 (1.5) 8
On 0.05 0.07
Operating time (s) Less than 0.3 (self- holding) Less than 0.3 (self- holding)
O ff Less than 3 (self- holding) Less than 3 (self- holding)
Required transformer capacity (VA) 400 700 700 700
Endurance voltage (V) 1500
Note (✽1) ( ) voltages are special options and might require an external resistor. For details, consult your dealer.
(✽2) ( ) shows starting currents.
71
General precautions for motor-operated electrical MCCBs Automatic Reset
● Motor-operated types have intermittent ratings, and therefore they ● Ifthe breaker is an auto reset type, it contains a built-in alarm
should not be operated more than 10 times consecutively (one switch and the off-control circuit closes when the breaker is tripped.
on/off counts as an operation). Since the breaker automatically resets itself after tripping, the
● The operating voltage should be between 85~110% of the rated power is easily restored by switching on the breaker again. With a
control voltage. UVT mounted, however, auto reset may not be possible. In this
● When the breaker is tripped by trip button or breakdown (i.e.,
case, please consult your dealer.
overload or short circuit), the breaker will not show that it has been
tripped (except for motor-operated type 1 breakers).
● The dielectric strength of the electrical operating circuits is 1500V.
When performing a dielectric strength test simultaneously with
another device at a voltage over 1500V, the operating circuit
terminal should be disconnected.
● Please insulate each electric operation device by the relay when
two or more electric operation devices are limped together and
operated.
The circumference circuit might be formed when each control
terminal is connected parallel directly, and it not operate normally.
Control circuit
The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automatic-
reset type.
95 T2 T2
95
ALa
ALa
M :Motor
X :Relay for ON operation
Y :Relay for OFF operation
Z :Relay for changing Motor polarity
T1 :Timer for antipumping
T2 :Timer for automatic reset
LS :Limit Switch
ALa :Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
72
5. Accessories
External Accessories
Spring-charged type
● Electrical operation Switching OFF a breaker with an electrical-operation device
When the ON switch is closed, the coil is excited to release the installed will take 3s. If instant opening is required, install an SHT or
latch mechanism and the force of the closing spring turns the UVT to the breaker.
breaker ON instantly. ● The breaker contains a built-in pumping-prevention relay.
When the OFF switch is closed, a relay starts the motor which turns
the breaker OFF and charges the spring simultaneously.
● Manual operation
Pressing the ON button will release the latch mechanism and the
force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly.
Pressing the leaf spring, pulling out the manual handle and pumping
it back and forth over 10 times will turn the breaker OFF and charge
the spring at the same time.
● Cautions during electrical operation
Whenever an electrical operation device is to be installed in or
removed from the breaker, the breaker must be tripped and the
device discharged.
Pushing the TRIP button on an MCCB with an electrical-operation Internal structure
device installed will not trip the breaker in the OFF state. This does
not mean the breaker is faulty.
Control circuit
The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automatic-
reset type.
Internal connection
CC.....Coil for making
Y.....Relay for pumping prevention
X.....Relay for self-sustaining on OFF side
Earth terminal LS1...Limit switch interlocking with cam
(DC-) P2 LS3 LS2...Limit switch interlocking with cam
LS3...Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plate
M....Motor
Operational X
M
power supply
P1 X X LS2
Y
Y
ON S2
LS1
OFF CC
RESET S4 Y
Ala
73
Dimensions
Front connection
25
45
P1P2 S1S2S4 P1P2 S1S2S4
ø8.5
Remarks:
The 2-pole models are 3-pole models
110–111
8
R1 with the central pole removed.
78
111
130
86
80
The three-pole type only is available
39
41
40
Automatic/ max. 19
for the model NF125-CW, and the
manual 3-pole and 4-pole types only are
selection (Conductor thickness available for the model NF125-SW.
switch t=5 max.)
61
ON button 158 Conductor drilling for
60 30 30 30 direct connection
Front plate 163 M4x0.7 screw 88
Trip button 86 86
90 90 Display hole or ø5
90 (Charge/Discharge) 3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole Font-plate cut out
120
(ON/OFF)
100
Breaker
Alarm switch AL
(micro loads use)
45
10
R1
indicator check.
2.2-pole breakers are 3-pole
86
80
78
144
165
126
breakers with the central pole
31
33
32
max. 24 removed.
(Bus t max=7)
3.NF250-CW is available in 2-and
3-pole only.
Terminal block Bus drilling for
ON button for alarm switch AL direct connection MB225-SW is available in 3-
MDS base connection
(M4 screw) 88 pole only.
100
24 Circuit breaker
50
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ø8.5
R1
78
10
86
144
165
126
80
35
32
37
Automatic/
max. 24
manual
selection
switch (Conductor thickness
t=7 max.)
ON button
Conductor drilling for
79 35 88
50
25
45
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ø8.5
110–111
R1
78
111
130
86
80
39
40
41
Automatic/ max.19
manual
selection (Conductor thickness
switch t=5 max.)
61
ON button Conductor drilling for
60 30 158
Front plate 163 30 30 88 direct connection
Trip button 86 86 Display hole
90 90 (Charge/Discharge) M4x0.7 screw
90 Test button 3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole or ø5 Font-plate cut out
120
● NV250-SEW, NV250-HEW
Insulating barrier Electrical operation device
Center of MDS Control circuit terminal
(removable) Power supply indicator LED(Red) Hex.socket head
Control circuit terminal (M3.5 screw)
Control circuit M8 bolt
OFFlock TRIP indicator Mounting screw
MANUAL/AUTO plate LED(Yellow) terminal cover
(M3 tapping screw)
switch
Breaker condition's Manual handle MDS Module
Alarm switch AL indicator 24 Center of MDS
15.5
Breaker
100
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4 P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
ø8.5
R1
10
80
126
indicator check.
31
32
33
74
5. Accessories
External Accessories
Front connection
● NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation device Center line of breaker
231
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44
device and breaker 8
Breaker Operating circuit terminal Breaker
110
block M3.5 screw
70
194
120
257
277
44
44 M6 44
44
43
16
tap or ø7
94.5
112 22 28
ø14 195 2, 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56
231 255
Trip button 168
2, 3-pole
185 Drilling plan
196
4-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
Breaker
Center line of electrical operation device ø12.5
43
ø7
47
70
234
297
120
277
257
20
156
ø12.5
ø7
44
44 M6 tap or Ø7
110
16
43
141
191.5
28 292
112 ø14
Drilling plan
352
140 M12 bolt
Trip button
231
194
120
257
277
44
44 M6 44
44
43
16
tap or ø7
94.5
112 22 28
ø14 195 2, 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56
231 255
Trip button 168
2, 3-pole
185 Drilling plan
196
4-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
194
120
257
277
44
44 M6 44
44
43
16
tap or ø7
94.5
112 22 28
ø14 195 2, 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56
231 255
Trip button 168
2, 3-pole
185 Drilling plan
196
4-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
75
Front connection
● NF400-UEW 4-pole Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical Center line of breaker
operation device
ø14 143
M12 bolt Conductor 97
Insulating barrier thickness
35 t=8 max. 6.5
16
ø14
110
Breaker
ø7
48
Center line of
breaker
15
70
290
322
120
275
ø14
112
ø7
23.5
Center line of
48
electrical operation device 140
35 Neutral pole 6.5
Trip button
70 141
210 191.5
Operating circuit
280 terminal block 292 Drilling plan
231 M3.5 screw 352
194
120
257
277
44 Test button
44 44
44 M6
43
16
5
94.5 tap or ø7
112 22 28 195
ø14 3-pole 4-pole
140 M12 bolt 56 255
231 168
Trip button
185 Drilling plan
196
3-pole 4-pole
275
243
120
277
44
Neutral
pole
15 32 8
87
70 M6 tap 70
46 or ø7
Trip button 140
35 40 2, 3-pole 4-pole
210 70 94.5
231 210 ø14 195 Drilling plan
280 M12 bolt 255
231
2, 3-pole 4-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
Breaker
110
ø14
Breaker
8 32
87
operation device
15
322
70
290
290
120
277
275
112
ø14
ø7
44
23.5
87
70 M6 tap 140
Trip button 35 8 or ø7
140 143 3-pole 4-pole
70 Neutral pole
210 191.5
231 210 Operating circuit
280
292 Drilling plan
terminal block 352
ø14
231 M3.5 screw
M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
76
5. Accessories
External Accessories
Front connection
● NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW Motor drive type (2)
46
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier Conductor thickness
device and breaker 14 Breaker 8
t=12 max.
Breaker
110
87
70
243
120
277
275
Operating circuit
44 terminal block
M3.5 screw
8
70
87
M6 tap
32
46 or ø7
3-pole
Trip button 94.5
15
40
Test button 195 Drilling plan
140
210 255
231 ø14
3-pole M12 bolt
375
44
13
8
Neutral pole
80
70 70
15 32
59 M8 screw
43 or ø10
Center line of electrical 140
ø13 140 3-pole 4-pole
operation device and 231
M12 bolt 210(3-pole) 3-pole model 290 Drilling plan
Bolt max.
(185.5)
(185.5)
M10×65 Breaker
38
Operating circuit
terminal block
61
375
120
406
M3.5 screw
35
44 Center line of electrical 210
operation device 280
210
130
115
70 70 M8 screw
69.5 or ø10
101.5 140
203
304.5 231
263
364.5
3-pole 4-pole
290
Neutral pole Drilling plan
77
Rear connection
● NF1600-SEW (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)
Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated 90° Mounting angle Breaker
M3.5 screw Connection Conductor thickness
allowance t=6×width 75 max.
15
18.5
over 160
20
109
269
61
406
120
under
81.5
ø17.5
ø9.5
100
273
38 15
44
38
60
36
M8 tap
70 or ø10
ø11
140 231 125 38 15 212
M10×50 bolt
210 290 200 3-pole Drilling plan
over 160
20
109
269
61
406
120
273
ø17.5
ø9.5
under 100
81.5
44
54 18
38
15
5
38 18
231 60
70 20 ø11 106 106 M8 tap
290 125 M10×50 bolt 70 or ø10
Center line of electrical 210 318
operation device 280
4-pole Drilling plan
375
406
120
233
38 15
over 175
36
44
ø17.5
38
60
ø11
ø9.5
406
120
233
375
over 175
44
ø17.5
ø9.5
38
15
38 18
231 60
70 ø11 106 106
Center line of electrical 290 125 M10×50 bolt 70 M8 tap
210 318 or ø10
operation device
280
4-pole Drilling plan
78
5. Accessories
External Accessories
22
13 breaker
63 (✽3)
dimensions.
31
Center of mechanical
50 interlock Please contact us for details.
15 Panel plate thickness Remark: 1. Please contact us for outside
Stroke (t1~3.2) Center of circuit dimensions of other models of
33
breaker
different specifications.
A
1.5
Breaker
22(30)
44(55)
Mechanical
Mechanical
22
44
interlock
interlock
E
Breaker
70 70(100)
Breaker
and breaker
Gap between panel External dimensions
94.5
and breaker
Mechanical
31(40)
Mechanical
31
interlock interlock
50
C
Breaker
G
Breaker
50(80)
D
P P
F F
P M6 screws
Mechanical interlock
( ) dimension are shown for NF1600-SS·NF1600-SSD or 7mm-dia
Drilling plan Drilling plan Drilling plan(breaker mount)
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
Note (✽1) Above 400AF, use panel thickness t=1.6~3.2mm.
(✽2) When the panel thickness is greater than t=2.3mm, use 4-5.5mm-dia 9.5mm dia countersunk (rear).
79
7. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder
Table 5-35
Description Lock cover (LC) Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL-S) (✽2) OFF Lock with 3 Padlock Card holder
Appearance
NF30-CS, MB30-CS 2P
LC-03CS HL-05FH — —
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS 3P
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P (✽1) HLS-05SW2P
NF63-SW/HW 4P
NF125-CW/SW 2P (✽1)
HLS-1SW2P
NF125-HW 2P
— CH-P No.5
HLF-1SW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW LC-1SW
3P HLN-1SW
MB100-SW, NV125-RW HLS-1SW
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW 4P
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW 2P (✽1)
HLF-2SW
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 3P LC-2SW HLS-2SW
HLN-2SW
NV250-RW 4P
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW HLF-2GSW (✽1)
3P, 4P LC-2GSW HLS-2GSW HLF3-2GSW
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW HLN-2GSW
Note (✽1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(✽2) HL-S types are used for OFF-lock.
Remark: 1. Users are requested to prepare padlocks for HL and HL-S types. (25mm padlock for HL, and 35mm padlock for HL-S.)
Table 5-36
Product Handle (HT) Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL- S) Card holder 5
Breaker type
C
35
35
35
CL CL L
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
2P DIN-05SW Fig.2
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW 5
3P
MB50-CW/SW
4
2P DIN-1SW2 8 1 13
NF125-CW/SW Mounting hook
3P
Fig.3 for IEC 35mm rail
2P DIN-1SW3
NF125-HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
3P
80
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V —
IEC 60947-2
AC 415V 1.5/1.5
(Icu/Ics)
380V 1.5/1.5
240V 2.5/2
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 (2pcs)
(Front connection) Small terminal cover 2pcs Only MB30-CS
Type NF30-CS
■Operating Characteristics
3h
2h
Types
1h NF30-CS
40min MB30-CS
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s
30s Max.
20s
Operating time
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s Min.
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
×100% of rated current
mounting mounting
Rated ambient
Operating time
250
200
150
2-pole
100
80
70
3-pole
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
Reference
Accessories Type name page
Terminal cover
81
Front connection
76.5
84
64
54
96
ø8.5
ø5.5
ø5
6
10
23.5 47 23.5
12.5 (max.)
28
45 67.5
49 2-pole 3-pole
Bus t max. =3
Drilling plan
2-pole 3-pole 3 52
Bus drilling for
direct connection
67
Rear connection
3-pole
M4 × 0.7 taps 2-pole
or ø5 Breaker
Mtg plate t max. =3.2 Breaker
R2
20
45 (min)
25 (min)
76.5
76.5
84
5
18
38.5
58.5
23.5 23.5 20
ø14
55 47
Insulating tube Front-plate cutout
8
Breaker mtg
M6 screw 2-pole 3-pole 1mm clearance on
M4 × 0.7 screw
each side of handle
2-pole 3-pole Drilling plan
6
100
35
31
4
52
Installation utensil
for 35mm IEC-rail 55
2-pole 3-pole 58
70
82
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF32-SW NF63-CW Type name NF32-SW NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW MB30-SW MB50-CW MB50-SW
0.8 1.2 1.4
NF63-SW NF63-HW Rated current In (Amp.)
3 4 (5) 6 10 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 10 (15) 16 20
(15) 16 20 25 16 20 25 (30) 32 16 20 25 (30) 32 25 (30) 32 40
2 2.5 4 5
8 10 12
16 25 32
0.8 1.2
1.4 2 2.5
7.1 8 10 12
(30) 32 40 50 (60) 63 40 50 (60) 63 50 (60) 63 40 45 4 5 7.1
MB30-SW MB50-CW 16 25 32
Number of poles 2 (✽1) 3 2 (✽1) 3 2 (✽1) 3 4 2 (✽1) 3 4 3 3 3
MB50-SW Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 690 500 500 500
Rated short-circuit
500V 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 7.5/4 – – –
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4 10/5 2.5/1 2.5/1 7.5/4
(Icu/Ics) 400V 5/2 5/2 7.5/4 10/5 5/2 5/2 7.5/4
230V 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8 25/13 7.5/4 7.5/4 15/8
DC 250V 2.5/1 – 2.5/1 – 7.5/4 – 7.5/4 – – – –
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) (✽2)
Type NF63-SW
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h DC use 2h AC use
AC use
1h 1h 1h
Types Types
Types
30min 30min NF32-SW 30min MB30-SW
20min
NF32-SW 20min NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW 20min MB50-CW MB50-SW
14min NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min
Operating time
Operating time
5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s
Min. Min. Min.
1s 1s 1s
Rated ambient
mounting mounting
Operating time
250
200
AL AX
150
SHT or UVT
3-pole 100
Lead wire 80
70
direction
Remark: 1. Refer to page 48. –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Reference Accessories Type name Reference
page page
F F-05S (✽1) 61 Mechanical
Ml Ml-05SW3 (✽1) 79
V V-05S 64 interlock
Operating handle
S S05SW 68 Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W (✽1)
Terminal cover
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(✽2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
83
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) M5×0.8 screw Applicable M4×0.7 taps
(M6 for 60A and 63A) wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2 or 5mm dia.hole
Mounting hole
24 Breaker
50
111
130
111
84
50
φ4.5
φ8.5
Trip button
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 60A and 63A)
22 25 45
25 25
Neutral pole
6
25 50 75 61
4 72 (Conductor thickness
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole t=5 max.) Drilling plan
90
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
2-pole 4-pole
R1
111
111
52
8
50 M4×0.7 screw
for mounting breaker 25 22.5
M6 screw φ14
27 min.
25 25 50 70
68 42 25 50 75
25
54
11
180
Center line of
83.5
111
54
80
54
7
25
25 50
21 M6 screw
10 55 φ6.5
57 82 107
89 30 Conductor drilling
Details of terminal 2-pole for direct connection 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
6mm-dia.hole or
Cutout and drilling plan or M5×0.8 taps
84
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690 690 500
690V – 8/4 10/5 –
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 10/5 25/13 50/25 25/13
IEC 60947-2 400V 10/5 30/15 50/25 30/15
(Icu/Ics) 230V 30/15 50/25 100/50 50/25
250V 7.5/4 – 15/8 – 40/20 – –
DC (✽1) 400V – 7.5/4 – 15/8 – 40/20 –
500V – – 15/8 – 40/20 –
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs) (✽2)
Note (✽1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and
4-pole models for up to 500 V DC.
Type NF125-SW (✽2) These are supplied with NF125-SW, NF125-HW, and MB100-SW models.
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h 2h
Tyeps Tyeps Tyeps
1h NF125-CW 50A~100A 1h 1h Tyeps 1h
NF125-SW 16A~20A MB100-SW 32A
NF125-SW 40A~100A NF125-CW 125A NF125-SW 32A
NF125-HW 16A~20A 30min NF125-SW 125A 30min
30min NF125-HW 40A~100A 30min MB100-SW 12.5A~25A NF125-HW 32A
20min MB100-SW 40A~100A 20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A) Max.
2min 2min 2min 2min
Max. (40A~50A) Max.
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. Min.
2s 2s Min. 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current Max. total ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
breaking time
■External Accessories
Type name Reference Type name Reference
Accessories page Accessories page
F F-1S (✽1) 61 Mechanical
interlock Ml Ml-05SW3 (✽1) 79
V V-1S 64
Operating handle
S S1SW 68 Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (✽1)
Terminal cover
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(✽2) Specify the working voltage. An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(✽3) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
85
Front connection
Insulation barrier
Solderless terminal
(removable)
for wire size
C
L C
L
Mounting hole M8 screw 14~2/0AWG CU/AL
C 24 Breaker
L C
L C
L C
L
50
(*1)110-111
C
L C
L
112
130
Wire connection
84
50
Trip
button
φ8.5 30 30
30 22 30 45
M4X0.7 taps
8
60 60 90 61
Neutral or 5mm-dia. hole
68
pole
90 120 19 max. 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
4 72
90
2-pole 3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole
4-pole
3-pole
Mounting base Breaker 2-pole 3-pole C
L
2-pole
102 C
L C
L C
L Breaker
Mounting plate Stud rotatable C
L C
L
t=3.2 max. 52 by 90°
(*1)110-111
C
L C
R1
112
1
R
52
8
C
L Connection
112
15 allowance
16
30 30 30 28
φ18 57
M4×0.7 86
8.5
60 30
5 breaker
M8 bolt
2.5
mounting screw 90
60
15 2.5 Insulation
90
M4×0.7 taps or 1.0mm clearance on each side
tube 5mm-dia. hole
68 54.5 15 of the handle frame.
72 104.5 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
6
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Plug-in
3-pole 4-pole
M5×0.8 125
Terminal block 95
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
mounting screw 90
Mounting plate
60
30 C
L C
L C
L
Plug-in terminal block
56
11
C
L C
L
5.5 20
190
134
98
54
94
16.5 max.
12
56
30
21 30 60
φ8.5
12.5 65
M8 screw
89 30 67 97 127
Note (✽1) It can respond to the attachment size of 110 and 111 both sides.
Remark: 1. 2-pole model of NF125-HW are 3-pole model with the central pole removed.
86
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF250-CW NF250-SW Type name NF160-SW NF160-HW NF250-CW NF250-SW NF250-HW MB225-SW
(100) (100)
NF250-HW NF160-SW Rated current In (Amp.) 125 150 160 125 150 160 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225
NF160-HW MB225-SW
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 600 690 690 500
690V – 5/3 – – 5/3 –
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 25/13 50/13 15/8 25/13 50/13 25/13
IEC 60947-2 400V 30/15 50/13 18/9 30/15 50/13 30/15
(Icu/Ics) 230V 50/25 100/25 35/18 50/25 100/25 50/25
250V 15/8 – 40/20 – 10/5 – 15/8 – 40/20 – –
DC (✽1) 400V – 15/8 – – 40/20 – – 10/5 – 15/8 – – 40/20 – –
500V – 15/8 – 40/20 – – 15/8 – 40/20 –
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Note (✽1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and 4-pole models for
up to 500 V DC.
Type NF250-SW
1h NF250-CW MB225-SW
120
NF250-SW NF160-SW
30min NF250-HW NF160-HW
20min 110
14min
10min
6min 100
4min
2min 90
Max.
Operating time
1min 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
30s
20s Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
■Internal Accessories
0.5s 250A AC
0.2s
Max. total Operating handle
125~225A AC breaking
0.1s
250A DC time Left-side Right-side
125~225A DC mounting mounting
0.05s
AL AX
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s SHT or UVT
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Lead wire
×100% of Rated current
direction
Remark: 1. Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB225-SW.
2. Refer to page 48.
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Reference Accessories Type name Reference
page page
F F-2S 61 Mechanical
interlock Ml Ml-05SW3 (✽1) 79
V V-2S 64
Operating handle
S S2SW 68 Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (✽1)
Terminal cover
Electrical
MDS-NF2SWE (✽2) 71
operation device
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(✽2) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB225-SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(✽3) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
87
Front connection
Insulating barrier
(removable) M8 bolt
(Hex-soket) 24
30
Breaker
Mounting hole
100
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125 175A 14 95mm2
200 250A 70 125mm2
144
165
126
102
Wire connection
50
ø4.5
φ8.5
10
Trip button
100
φ8.5
45
35 35
22 35
Neutral 61 23 max.
M4×0.7 taps
pole or φ5
70 68
105
(Bus t max.=7)
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
105 140
Bus drilling for
92 Drilling plan
direct connection
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
3-pole
4-pole
Mounting plate Insulating Stud can be
tube rotated 90° Breaker Breaker
t max.=3.2
3-pole
Connection
8
1
allowance
126
144
52
144
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting 32.5
ø24 35
15 6 screw
35 35 100
15 φ9 70 M4×0.7
Insulating taps
M8 bolt tube
68 71
70 or φ5 105 1mm clearance
105
on each side
of handle
6
72 106 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan Front-plate cutout
Plug-in
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker (Terminal block)
Mounting plate Plug-in terminal block
34.5
allowance
Connection
58.5
144
200
54
80
14
22
70
6
58.5
153
28
15
M6 70 105
φ7
18 Terminal block
mounting screw 20 107
φ9 142
86 32 M8 bolt
Stud attachable in this 70 3-pole 4-pole
derection only Drilling plan
105 Insulating barrier
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2- and 3-pole models are available for the model of NF250-CW, and only 3-pole models are available
for the model of MB225-SW.
88
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690
690V 8/8 8/8 20/20 20/20 8/8 8/8
500V 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50 30/30 30/30
Number of poles 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690
Type NF250-SGW 690V 20/20 20/20 8/8 8/8 20/20 20/20
500V 50/50 50/50 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50
braking capacity (kA)
Rated short-circuit
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h 4h
Electric types
2h 2h 2h 2h
Thermal-Adjustable types NF125-SGW NF125-HGW
1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h NF250-SGW/HGW 160-250A (Rated current In=250A) 1h Note)
NF125-SGW/HGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A) NF125-SGW/HGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A)
NF160-SGW/HGW 125-160A (Rated current In=160A) Current setting Ir Rated current In
30min 16-25A (Rated current In=25A) 30min 40-63A (Rated current In=63A) 30min NF125-SGW/HGW 80-125A (Rated current In=125A) 30min 16~ 32A 32A
20min 20min 20min 20min 32~ 63A 63A
14min 14min 14min 63~ 100A 100A
10min 10min 10min 10min 75~ 125A 125A
Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip adjustment (Adjustable)
6min 6min 6min 6min
current ratio current ratio Max. range
4min AC DC 4min AC DC 4min Position AC DC 4min LTD operating time TL
x In (%) x In (%) x In (%) x In (%) of notch x In (%) x In (%) 12-60-80-100s ± 20%
2min 1000±200 1300±260 2min 1000±200 1300±260 2min 4 400±80 520±104 2min
Max. Max. (at 200%)
6 600 780
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Rated ambient
6min
Current rating (%)
6min
4min LTD operating time TL 4min LTD operating time TL 120
12-60-80-100s ±20% 12-60-80-100s ± 20% 120
2min 2min
(at 200%) (at 200%)
110
1min 1min 110
Operating time
Operating time
for ON-lock.
LC LC-2GSW Large TC-L TCL-2GSW3W (✽1) (✽3) Specify the working voltage.
(✽2) HLF-2GSW Skeleton TTC TTC-2GSW3 (✽1) 70
Handle lock device 80
HL HLN-2GSW Rear BTC BTC-2GSW3W (✽1)
HL-S HLS-2GSW Plug-in PTC PTC-2GSW3W (✽1)
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock HLF3-2GSW 80
Electrical MDS-NF2GSWE
Remark: 1. Refer to page 48. operation device
71
(✽3)
89
Front connection
Solderless terminal
Insulating barrier for wire size
(removable) 2.5 185mm2
M8 bolt
10
24
(Hex-soket) Breaker
Mounting hole
50
6.1
144
165
112
126
50
φ4.5
Hex-socket set screw
Trip Wire connection
50
φ8.5
button 22
φ8.5 35 35
22 35
63
10
Neutral M4×0.7 taps
70 105 pole 79 or φ5
86
3-pole 4-pole
105 140 24 max.
Drilling plan
4 90
3-pole 4-pole (Bus t max.=7)
110 Bus drilling for
direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
4-pole
3-pole
Mounting plate Stud can be
rotated 90° 3-pole Breaker
t max.=3.2 Breaker
Connection
8
1
144
126
144
52
R
allowance
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 32.5
15 φ24 35
6 mounting
screw
15 φ9 M4×0.7 100
70 Insulating 35 taps 35
M8 bolt
tube or φ5
86 71
105 70 105 1mm clearance
90 106 on each side
6
of handle
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
Plug-in
54
4
allowance
Connection
66
94
M8 bolt
120
144
200
96
12 (Hex-soket)
54
103
48
110
70 105
φ7
10
48
15 107 142
M6 20
Terminal block ø9 M8bolt
3-pole 4-pole
86 30 45 mounting screw 70
Stud can be
rotated 90° Insulating barrier Drilling plan
(removable)
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
90
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690 690
690V 25/25 30/30 25/25 30/30
Rated short-circuit
AC 440V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
IEC 60947-2 400V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
(Icu/Ics) 230V 125/125 200/200 125/125 200/200
300V – – – –
DC 500V – – – –
600V – – – –
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
(Front connection) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type NF250-RGW
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h Thermal-Adjustable types 1h Thermal-Adjustable types
NF250-RGW/UGW 160-225A (Rated current In=225A) NF125-RGW/UGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A) NF125-RGW/UGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A)
30min 125-160A (Rated current In=160A) 30min 40-63A (Rated current In=63A) 30min 16-25A (Rated current In=25A)
20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip Instantaneous trip
6min adjustment range 6min 6min
Max. current ratio current ratio
4min Position AC 4min AC 4min AC
of notch x In (%) x In (%) x In (%)
2min 4 400±80 2min 1000±200 2min 1000±200
Max. Max.
6 600
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min
8 800
30s 10 1000±200 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
1s 1s 1s
AC
0.5s (Adjustable range) 0.5s 0.5s
AC AC
Max. total Max. total Max. total
0.2s breaking
0.2s breaking
0.2s
breaking
time time time
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Left-side Right-side
Current rating (%)
110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Reference Accessories Type name Reference
page page
F F-2UG 61 Small TC-S TCS-2GSW3W (✽1)
Terminal cover
91
Front connection
Solderless terminal
Insulating barrier for wire size
M8 bolt
(removable) (Hex-soket) 2.5 185mm2 Breaker
24
26.5
10
Mounting hole
50
75
6.1
219
240
201
165
112
50
Hex-socket set screw
φ4.5
Wire connection
Trip
φ8.5
50
button 22
10
φ8.5
35 35
22 35 63
Neutral
pole 79 M4×0.7 taps
70 105 24 max. or φ5
86
3-pole 4-pole
105 140 4 90
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole 110 direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
Breaker 3-pole
Mounting plate 4-pole
Stud can be Breaker
t max.=3.2 rotated 90°
3-pole
73
11.5
108
219
201
219
8
Connection
allowance
52
R
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 32.5
15 6 mounting ø24 35
screw
φ9 M4×0.7 100
15 M8 bolt 35 35
70 taps
Insulating
tube or φ5
86 71 70 105 1mm clearance
105 on each side
3-pole 4-pole of handle
6
90 106
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
Plug-in
Connection
58.5
22 allowance
129
155
275
219
14
15
70
153
6
58.5
28
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
92
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 15/8 30/30
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 25/13 42/42
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 45/45
230V 50/25 85/85
DC(✽1) 250V 20/10 40/40
Front Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Standard Attached Parts
Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
connection
Type NF400-SW Note (✽1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, 3-pole models can be
used for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Type 1h Type
NF400-CW NF400-SW
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Max. Max.
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max. total 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
130
Left-side Right-side Lead wire
Current rating (%)
110
100
(✽1)
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(✽1) (✽1) (✽1) (Reference ambient temperature 40°C)
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
93
Front connection
94.5
Insulating barrier (removable)
44
28
Conductor thickness 8 4-pole
16
t=8 max. 3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Breaker
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
47
92
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
25
39 ø10.5
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
Conductor drilling for
ø14 97 direct connection
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each side of the
112 185 3-pole 4-pole handle frame.
140 196 155 (NF400-SW) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134 (NF400-CW)
3-pole 4-pole
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker ø35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulation tube 87 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 43.5 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
6
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
4-pole
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block 3-pole
Breaker
35
55
225
allowance
135
163
24 mounting screw
24
8
79
55
160
ø10
15
28
28
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
94
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
Front Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Standard Attached Parts
Rear Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
connection
Type NF400-SEW
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h Types
NF400-SEW
2h NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
1h
Current setting Rated Current
LTD operating time Ir: 200~400A In: 400A
30min
at 125% (Adjustable)
20min
14min 1000s(TL=150s set)
10min 670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s
Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
Rated ambient
110
100
(✽1)
90
80
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
95
Front connection
94.5
Insulating barrier (removable)
44
28 Conductor thickness
8 4-pole
t=8 max.
16
110
Breaker 3-pole
43
Breaker
39
Mounting hole
194
102
12
257
R6
59
92
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
25
39
ø10.5
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
Neutral pole
44 Conductor thickness t=8 max.
118
Conductor drilling for
ø14 97 direct connection
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each side of
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole the handle frame.
140 196
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
225
194
265
14
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker ø35
44 44 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulation tube 87 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 43.5 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
6
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 3-pole Breaker
35
55
225
allowance
135
163
24 mounting screw
24
8
79
55
160
ø10
15
28
28
18 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 136 181
87
ø13 Insulating barrier
M12 bolt 130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
96
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Front Mounting screw: M6×65 (2pcs), M6×174 (2pcs)
Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
Mounting screw: M6×72 (2pcs), M6×181 (2pcs)
connection
Type NF400-UEW
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h
Type
NF400-UEW
2h
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
0.2s 2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
110
100
(✽1)
90
80
(✽1) (✽1) (✽1)
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
97
Front connection
t=8 max. 8
Breaker
43
ø7
26
ø12.5
Mounting hole
R6
47
31
297
11.5
234
257
102
92
156
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
25
39
ø10.5
43
44 M6 tap or ø7
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
16
141 118
Conductor drilling for direct connection
191.5
ø14
51 M12 bolt 194
1.0mm clearance on each side
28 200
of the handle frame.
112 5 204 3-pole
140 252 Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole
24 24
8
M6 screw or ø7
Connection 4-M6 tap or ø7
234
265
allowance
305
265
234
265
25 20 20
14
24 24
26
83
128
11 11
8-M4 screw
M6 screw for ø35
10 Add these tapped holes in
mounting breaker 44
ø13 44 8 positions to standard boring.
210 8
M12 bolt 87
87
87 Insulation tube
Load side
3-pole Drilling plan
6
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
Mounting angle
Mounting angle
max. 203
Connection
320
297
265
175
160
28
15
Remark: 1. Overall dimension of 4-pole model is same as that of 4-pole model of NF800-UEW. Refer to page 98.
98
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 36/18 42/42
(Icu/Ics) 400V 36/18 50/50
230V 50/25 85/85
DC (✽1) 250V 20/10 40/40
Front Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
connection Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
Type NF630-SW Note (✽1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, 3-pole models can be used
for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Type 1h Type
NF630-CW NF630-SW
30min 30min
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Max. Max.
30s 30s
Operating time
Operating time
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
AC
0.5s 0.5s
DC
0.2s 0.2s
DC AC
0.1s Max.total 0.1s Max.total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time delay trip Instantaneous trip Time delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
130
Left-side Right-side Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT
Current rating (%)
120
110
(✽1) 100
90
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. (Reference ambient temperature 40°C) Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
99
Front connection
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL 4-pole
Bus 44
28
t max.=10 8 30 3-pole
ø10.5
CL
110
16
Bus t max.=10 Breaker
CL
Bus drilling for
43
direct connection
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
102
CL CL
92
59
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
39
194
CL
97
ø14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or ø7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196
4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
rotated 90° 3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-ø35
CL CL
24 24
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or ø7 4-M6 tap
or ø7
225
265
194
225
225
194
CL CL
14
25 20 20
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped
113 87 Insulating tube 87 43.5
M12 bolt 44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center &
neutral poles
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole Load side
6
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance
225
280
163
135
CL 25 M8 terminal block CL
mounting screw
25
10
93
55
28
160
ø10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
Remark: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
100
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 85/85 100/100 150/75
Front Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts connection Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.) Rear
Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
connection
Type NF630-SEW
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h Types
NF630-SEW
2h NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
1h
Current setting Rated Current
LTD operating time
30min Ir: 300~630A In: 630A
at 125%
20min (Adjustable)
1000s(TL=150s set)
14min
10min 670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
130
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
AX SHT or UVT direction PAL 120
mounting mounting
110
100
(✽1) 90
80
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
101
Front connection
12
Insulating barrier
(removable) 94.5
CL 4-pole
Bus 44
28
t max.=10 8 30 3-pole
ø10.5
CL
110
16
Bus t max.=10 Breaker
CL
Bus drilling for
43
direct connection
39
Mounting hole CL Breaker CL
R6
257
102
CL CL
92
59
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button
39
194
CL
97
ø14 1.0mm clearance on each
M12 bolt 56 103 side of handle.
M6 screw
51 44 or ø7 44
168 5 107
Front-plate cutout
112 185 155 3-pole 4-pole
140 196
4-pole
Line side
Mounting plate Stud can be Breaker Eddy-current
rotated 90° 3-pole heat-reducing slit 6-ø35
CL CL
24 24
8
Connection M6 screw
allowance or ø7 4-M6 tap
or ø7
225
265
194
225
225
194
CL CL
14
25 20 20
83
32
128
24 24
M6 breaker
mounting screw
44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped
113 87 Insulating tube 87 43.5
M12 bolt 44 holes in 8 positions
attached to
130.5 3P:Center pole to standard boring.
130.5 87
4P:Center &
6
neutral poles
3-pole 4-pole Load side
Drilling plan
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate
3-pole
CL Breaker CL
CL
35
55
Connection allowance
225
280
163
135
CL 25 M8 terminal block CL
mounting screw
25
10
93
55
28
160
ø10
20
30 Stud attachable in
18 44 87
this direction only
102
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 18/9 30/30 50/50 70/35
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 36/18 42/42 65/65 125/63
(Icu/Ics)
400V 36/18 50/50 70/70 125/63
230V 50/25 85/85 100/100 150/75
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h Types
NF800-CEW
NF800-SEW
2h NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
1h
LTD operating time Current setting Rated Current
30min
at 125% Ir: 400~800A In: 800A
20min
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
14min
10min 670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s Tp= 0.2 ± 0.04s
2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
Operating handle
130
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
temperature
110
The rated current does not
100 depend on temperature.
However, if ambient
(✽1) (✽1) 90 temperature exceeds 40°C,
reduce the continuous
80
working current as left
(✽1) (✽1) 70 curve.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
103
Front connection
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
t=12 max. 46
4-pole
8 3-pole
110
Breaker
87
32
Breake
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
Terminal dimension for R6
directly connecting
243
102
275
conductor
15
92
32
ø8
N
8
ø8.5
ø14 8
87
14
32
12
70 M6 tap 70 51
46
22 or ø7 172
Trip button
15
51 70 97
40
40 210 103
Neutral pole 1.0mm clearance on each
140
5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.) 3-pole 4-pole side of the handle frame.
210 280
ø14 Conductor drilling for direct connection
M12 bolt 155
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole 217
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
295
243
243
12.5
13
45
24 24
10
8 70
8 32 15 70
140 11 11 8-M4 screw
70 Add these tapped holes in
113 110 ø13 M6 screw for 140 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
M12 bolt mounting breaker 210
140
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
6
Plug-in
20
155
187
243
301
13
10
112
56
32
25
15
40 70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw ø10
140 ø13 208 278
126
M12 bolt
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
104
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Type NF800-SDW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
Type
1h NF800-SDW
30min 700A,800A
20min DC
14min
10min
6min
Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps)
1min. Lo 2600±520
2 3900±780
30s 3 5200±1040
20s Hi 6500±1300
10s
Min.
5s
2s
Adjustment
range
1s 700A
0.5s
Adjustment
0.2s range
800A
0.1s
Max. total
interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Inst trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
130
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
AX SHT or UVT
Current rating (%)
110
90
(✽1) (✽1) 80
Rated ambient 40°C 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting. Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
105
Front connection Breaker
94.5
Mounting hole Insulating barrier (removable) Conductor thickness 26
46 4-pole
t=12 max.
3-pole
8
110
Breaker
87
32
Auxiliary handle
(removable) Terminal dimension for R6
70 M6 tap or ø7
directly connecting
conductor
102
275
92
3-pole
15 ø8.5
12
N
ø8
8
22
ø14
8
32
87
14 51
32
40 172
243
46
15
Trip button 51 70 97
1.0mm clearance on each
40 210 103 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Neutral pole side of the handle frame.
140
5 107
210 280 Conductor drilling for direct connection Front-panel cutout
ø14
M12 bolt 155 70
3-pole 4-pole 217
4-pole
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
Connection allowance Stud can be rotated 90°
25 Breaker Groove for reducing heat
Mounting plate by overcurrent 6-ø48
24 24
10
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
295
243
243
12.5
13
45
24 24
10 8
70
70
8 32 15 140 11 11 8-M4 screw
70 Add these tapped holes in
ø13 M6 screw for 140 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
113 110 M12 bolt mounting breaker 210
140
3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole
6
Plug-in
20
155
187
243
301
13
8
112
56
32
25
15
40
70 140
23 M8 terminal block mounting screw ø10
140 ø13 208 278
M12 bolt
126
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Standard specification of NF800-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
106
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 170/170
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 200/200
(Icu/Ics)
400V 200/200
230V 200/200
Mounting screw: 3P: M6×35, M6×132 (2pcs each)
Front 4P: M6×35 (3pcs), M6×132 (2pcs)
Standard Attached Parts connection
(4-pole models are provided Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
with auxiliary handle.) Mounting screw: 3P: M6×40, M6×137 (2pcs each)
Rear
connection 4P: M6×40 (3pcs), M6×137 (2pcs)
Type NF800-UEW
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h Type
NF800-UEW
2h
1h Current setting
LTD operating time Ir: 400~800A Rated Current
30min
at-125%
20min (Adjustable) In: 800A
14min 1000s(TL=150s set)
10min 670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
6min
80s(TL= 12s set)
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
Ir x(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s STD operating time Ts
operating time Tp
TL ±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2s
Tp=
2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
130
Rated ambient
110
100
(✽1) (✽1) 90
80
(✽1) (✽1) 70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Electrical operation
device 71
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
107
Front connection
87
Auxiliary handle
ø14
ø7
(removable)
27.5
322 15 Terminal dimension for
directly connecting
275
102
112 conductor
ø8.5
ø7
N
12
8
ø14
8
22
87
14
32
143 4-pole
40
Trip button 51 194 3-pole
70
15
200 Breaker
40 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
210 Neutral pole 5 204
140
210 280 252 Conductor drilling for
ø14
22.5
M12 bolt 314 direct connection R6
3-pole 4-pole
143
92
Conductor
Insulating barrier (removable) thickness 97
Mounting hole t=8 max.
6.5
70
Auxiliary handle
110
ø14
Breaker (removable) 51
ø7
48
172
275
Front-panel cutout
102
112
ø7
16
N
48
ø14
70 70 Trip button
6.5
M6 screw or ø7 51 35
3-pole 4-pole 141
Neutral pole
Drilling plan 70
ø14 194
210 M12 bolt
200
280
5 204
252
NF400-UEW 4-pole
314
25 25
5
24 24
10
8
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
290
290
290
342
290
342
12.5
13
26
45
24 24
11 11 8-M4 screw
8 32 15 70 20
70 Add these tapped holes in
10 10 10 70
70 8 positions to standard boring.
ø13 M6 screw for ø48 ø13
210 110 140 140 210 83 140
M12 bolt mounting 210 M12 bolt
breaker
3-pole 4-pole NF400-UEW 4-pole
Drilling plan
108
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43 85/43
230V 125/63 125/63
Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
Front
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Standard Attached Parts
Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
Rear
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Type NF1250-SEW connection
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■Operating Characteristics
10h 10h
5h 5h
Type Type
NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW
2h 2h
Current setting Rated Current Current setting Rated Current
1h 1h LTD operating time
LTD operating time at-125% Ir:500-1000A In:1000A Ir:600-1250A In:1250A
1000s(TL=150s set) at-125% (Adjustable)
30min (Adjustable) 30min
670s(TL=100s set) 1000s(TL=150s set)
20min 400s(TL= 60s set) 20min 670s(TL=100s set)
14min 80s(TL= 12s set) 14min 400s(TL= 60s set)
10min 10min 80s(TL= 12s set)
6min 6min
4min 4min
1min
Operating time
1min
30s 30s
20s 20s
1s 1s
130
Rated ambient
110
100
90
80
70
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
109
Front connection
Conductor thickness 15 40
Insulating barrier (removable)
t=8 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
110
Mounting Breaker
hole
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
346
406
375
ø9.5
13
15 32 8
ø17.5
80
18.5
Neutral pole 70 M8 tap or ø10 70
15 44
43 70 133.5
17 3-pole 4-pole
140 210 140
ø13 M12 bolt 210 280 190
280 Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
3-pole Breaker
M8 screw for mounting breaker Breaker
35.5
Stud can be rotated 90°
86
R11.5
109
269
97
18 Connection
273
39.5
81.5
allowance
ø13
22
Conductor thickness
13
86
45
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block Breaker
M10 terminal block mounting screw
28.5
Stud can be rotated 90°
6
136
269
105
100.5
25.5
269
13
28.5
225
30
15 32 8
104
136
12
Connection
allowance ø12
ø13
Conductor thickness 43
Insulating 70 140
t=6 × 2pcs max. 140
barrier 204 274
68
Bolt M12 × 45
208 134 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
110
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
■Operating Characteristics
3h 3h
2h 2h
1h 1h
Type Type
40min 40min
NF1250-SDW NF1250-SDW
1000A 1250A
20min 20min
DC DC
Maximum
10min 10min
Maximum
6min 6min
4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
40s 40s
Inst. trip adjustment range
30s
Operating time
30s Minimum
Operating time
(4 steps)
20s Inst. trip adjustment range 20s
Minimum
(4 steps) Control Inst. trip
10s 10s setting current(A)
Control Inst. trip
6s setting current(A) 6s L0 2800 ± 700
4s L0 2800 ± 700 4s 2 4200 ± 700
2 4200 ± 700 3 5600 ± 700
2s 2s
3 5600 ± 700 Hi 7000 ± 700
1s Hi 7000 ± 700 1s
0.6s 0.6s
0.4s 0.4s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.06s Max. total 0.06s Max. total
interrupting time interrupting time
0.0.4s 0.0.4s
Time 0.02s Time
0.02s
delay trip Inst. trip delay trip Inst. trip
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70
90
80
5 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49. Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Reference Reference
Accessories Type name page Accessories Type name
page
F F10SW (✽1) — Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
Operating handle 80
S S10SW 68 Handle lock (HL)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-10SW3 (✽1) 79 Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-10SW3 (✽1) 70
Electrical operation device 71
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
111
Front connection Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
Insulating barrier
(removable) Conductor thickness 15 40
t=8 × 2pcs max.
Mounting hole
Bolt M12 × 50 Breaker
110
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
406
375
346
ø9.5
13
15 32 8
ø17.5
80
18.5 70 70
15 44 M8 screw or ø10
43 70 133.5
140 210 17 140
ø13 M12 bolt 3-pole 4-pole
210 280 190
280
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
Rear connection Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
R11.5
375
233
97
Connection allowance
22 ø13
13
86
Conductor thickness
45
18 12 70 70
80
140 230 300
8 32 15 Insulation cover
(removable) M8 screw or ø10
140 97 1.0mm clearance on each side
3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
6
Plug-in Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block M10 terminal block mounting screw Breaker
Stud can be rotated 90˚
248
318
375
48
12
13
30
104
8
32
Connection allowance
15
Drilling plan
Remark: 1. Standard specifications of NF1250-SDW is 2-pole models. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
112
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Rated short-circuit
500V 65/33
IEC 60947-2
AC 440V 85/43
(Icu/Ics)
400V 85/43
230V 125/63
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Front
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
connection
Standard Attached Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Parts
Rear Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
connection Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Type NF1600-SEW
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h
Type
2h NF1600-SEW
Current setting Rated Current
1h LTD operating time at-125% Ir:800-1600A In:1600A
1000s(TL=150s set) (Adjustable)
30min 670s(TL=100s set)
20min 400s(TL= 60s set)
14min 80s(TL= 12s set)
10min
6min
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min
12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%)
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip STD pickup current Is
5s In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10% -5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
2s
1s
Rated ambient
110
100
90
80
Remark: 1. Refer to page 49.
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Reference Reference
Accessories Type name page Accessories Type name page
F F10SW (✽1) — Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
Operating handle 80
S S10SW 68 Handle lock (HL)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-16SW3 (✽1) 79 Electrical operation device 71
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
113
Front connection
Breaker
(185.5)
(185.5)
406
97
346
375
ø17.5
ø9.5
N
115
130
80
M8 tap or ø10
20 49.5 70 70
203 133.5 1.0mm clearance on each side
101.5
Neutral pole 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
263 304.5 17 140
364.5 190
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
280
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
Connection 15 38 15
allowance
38
60
106 106
18
318
212
160 min.
20
20
269
100 max.
109
109
273
273
15 Connection
81.5
allowance
18
38
M8 tap or ø10
60
36
70 70
54
15
140
6
38 38 ø11 70 3-pole 4-pole
ø11
125 15 BM10 × 50 bolt 210 140 125 M10 × 50 bolt
3-pole 140 200 4-pole Drilling plan
114
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
■Operating Characteristics
4h
Type
2h NF1600-SDW
for MAG-ONLY
1h
1600A
30min DC
20min
Max. allowable time of Overcurrent
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
Inst. trip adjustment
10s range (4 steps)
2s Lo 3200±800
2 4800±800
1s 3 6400±800
Hi 8000±800
0.5s
0.2s
0.02s
Inst.trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
■Internal Accessories
Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL Lead wire
AX SHT or UVT direction
mounting mounting
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Reference Reference
Accessories Type name page Accessories Type name page
F F10SW (✽1) — Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
Operating handle 80
S S10SW 68 Handle lock (HL)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-16SW3 (✽1) 79 Electrical operation device 71
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
115
Front connection Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1600-SEW.
3-pole Breaker
Auxiliary handle Breaker
(removable)
R11.5
406
346
375
97
ø17.5
ø9.5
115
130
M8 tap or ø10
20 49.5 70 70 80
101.5 133.5
203
304.5 1.0mm clearance on each side
263 17 140
364.5 3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
190
280
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
Connection allowance 15 38 15
38
60
106 106
18
318
212
109
Connection allowance
375
233
233
15
36
60
38
140 ø11 70 70
38 15 M10 × 50 bolt
38 M8 tap or ø10
Stud can be rotated 90˚ 15
Stud is in horizontal direction.
6
125 140 125
Stud can not be rotated 90˚
140 200 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
3-pole 4-pole
Remark: 1. Standard specification of NF1600-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.
2. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
116
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Type NV30-CS
6min 2min
1min
4min
Operating time
30s
2min
10s
5s
1min
Operating time
40s 2s
30s Max. 1s
20s 0.5s
10s 0.2s
0.1s
6s
4s 0.04s
0.02s
2s 0.01s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
250
mounting mounting direction
MG 200
150
100
80
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: 1. Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be produced
upon request. Ambient temperature (°C)
2. Refer to page 48.
70
Line side
Magnetic Senstivity
device selector
Leakage
indication button
117
Front connection
67.5
Mtg. hole M5 screw 14.5 Breaker
Applicable
Test button
wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm2
76.5
84
64
54
50
96
ø8.5
10 ø5.5
ø5
6
Leakage 28 12.5 (max) M4 ✕ 0.7
23.5 23.5
indicator button taps or ø5
47 49
Bus t max. =3
52
Bus drilling for Drilling plan
4 55 direct connection
67
Rear connection
M4 ✕ 0.7 taps
or ø5 Breaker
Mtg plate t max =3.2 Breaker
R1
45 (min)
25 (min)
76.5
76.5
84
52
5
38.5
58.5
23.5 ø14 65
55 47
Insulating tube
8
Front-plate cutout
M6 screw Breaker mtg
M4 ✕ 0.7 screw Drilling plan
118
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Type NV63-SW
Max. 30s
Operating time
1min
30s 10s
20s 5s
10s 2s
1s
5s
0.5s
2s 0.2s
Min.
1s 0.1s
0.5s 0.04s
0.02s
0.2s 0.01s
0.1s
25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
Ground-fault current
0.02s (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Operating handle
Left-side Right-side 300
Rated ambient
250
mounting mounting
200
AL AX UVT
150
MG EAL 100
80
70
Lead wire
TBM
Remark: 1. Refer to page 48. direction –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Operating handle
Line side
Leakage
Note (✽1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. indication button
119
Front connection
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 63A)
111
111
130
50
84
φ4.5
φ8.5
6
22 Leakage
Trip button 45 25 M4×0.7 taps
indicaton button
12.5 max. or 5mm dia.hole
50 Test button 61
(Conductor thickness
68 t=5 max.)
75
4 72 Conductor drilling
Drilling plan
for direct connection
90
Rear connection
1
R
52
8
111
φ14
70
M4×0.7 screw
50 for mounting breaker 25
M4×0.7 taps
27 min.
M6 screw 1.0mm clearance on each side of
50
or 5mm-dia.hole
the handle frame.
68
72 42
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
M5×0.8
terminal block mounting screw
80
Mounting panel 50
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in terminal block
3
54
15.5
11
83.5
Center line of
111
180
80
54
16.5 max.
54
7
25
21 M6 screw 6mm-dia.hole or
M5×0.8 taps
10 89 30 φ6.5 82
120
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h 2h
Types
1h NV125-CW 63A~100A 1h Types 1h Types 1h Types
NV125-SW 40A~100A NV125-SW 16A~20A NV125-CW 125A NV125-SW 32A
30min NV125-HW 40A~100A 30min 30min 30min
NV125-HW 16A~20A NV125-SW 125A NV125-HW 32A
20min 20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A)
Operating time
Operating time
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
2min 2min 2min 2min
Max. (40A~50A) Max.
1min 1min 1min 1min
Max.
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. Min.
Min.
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
AL AX
Rated nonoperating current
10min UVT
110
Rated current sensitivity
Lead wire
Rated current sensitivity
4min
MG EAL TBM
Rated nonoperating current
2min
Rated current sensitivity
10s 90
5s
2s 80
1s –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Inertial
0.5s nonoperating time
Inertial
0.2s nonoperating time
Ambient temperature (°C)
0.1s
Inertial
0.04s nonoperating time
0.02s Remark: 1. Refer to page 48.
0.01s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Load side
Electrical
MDS-NV1SWE (✽2) 71 Leakage
operation device
indication button
Note (✽1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(✽2) Specify the working voltage.
(✽3) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
121
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) Solderless terminal
for wire size
Mounting hole C
L 14~2/0AWG CU/AL
M8 screw Breaker
24
C
L C C
50
(*1) 110-111
C
L (time-delay type) (time-delay type) C
L
130
112
50
84
Leakage Leakage Wire connection
indication button indication button
ø8.5
Trip 22 Trip 30 45 30 30
button Neutral pole
button
8
60 90 61 M4× 0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia. hole
68
90 120
19 max.
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
90
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
Mounting base Breaker
3-pole 3-pole C
L
102 C
L C
L
Mounting plate Breaker
52 Stud rotatable C
L
t=3.2 max.
by 90°
(*1) 110-111
C
L
112
Connection C
L 1
R
52
8
C allowance
112
L
15
16
30
28
30 φ18 30
8.5
5 M4× 0.7 86
60 90
M8 bolt breaker
2.5 60 mounting screw
M4× 0.7 taps or
15 2.5 90 5mm-dia. hole
Insulation
68 54.5 15 tube 1.0mm clearance on each side
3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
6
72 104.5
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
Plug-in
4-pole
M5× 0.8
Terminal block mounting screw 125
11
C
L C
L
54
94
5.5 20
190
134
98
16.5 max.
12
56
21 60
30 60
φ8.5
12.5 95
M8 screw
89 30 97 127
Conductor drilling
Details of terminal 3-pole for direct connection
6mm-dia. hole
3-pole 4-pole or M5× 0.8 taps
Drilling plan
Note (✽1) It can respond to the attachment size of 110 and 111 both sides.
Remark: 1. NV125-CW is available in 3-pole only.
122
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
NV250-HW Rated current In (Amp.)
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4
100–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽1)
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30, 100 • 200 • 500 30, 100 • 200 • 500 30, 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 15/8 25/13 50/13
breaking capacity (kA) AC400V 18/9 30/15 50/13
IEC 60947-2 2nd. ed. (Icu/Ics)
AC230V 35/18 50/25 100/25
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type NV250-SW Note (✽1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
10min
Max.
Operating time
1min
1min
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
5s
2s
Min.
2s 1s
1s Inertial
0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
0.5s 250A 0.2s nonoperating time
0.2s 125~ Max.total 0.1s
225A breaking time Inertial
0.1s
0.04s nonoperating time
0.05s 0.02s
0.02s 0.01s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
130
Left-side Right-side AL AX
Curreny rating (%)
100
90
(✽1) 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note (✽1) Refer to page 48.
(rated ambient 40°C)
Load side
Electrical
MDS-NV2SWE (✽3) 71
operation device
Leakage
Note (✽1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
indication button
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(✽3) Specify the working voltage.
123
Front connection
30
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier M8 bolt
24
(removable) (Hex-soket)
Trip button C
L Breaker
Solderless terminal
100
C
L for wire size C
L C
L
Sensitivity
selector 125~175A 14~95mm2
200~250A 70~125mm2
Wire connection
Operating time
C
L C
L
126
144
165
102
selector
50
(for time-delay
φ4.5
type)
φ8.5
Leakage
100
45
indication
φ8.5
35 35
10
button
61
22 35 M4×0.7 screw
Neutral or φ5
Test button
pole 68
70 105 23 max.
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
105 140 (Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection Drilling plan
92
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
Stud can be 4-pole 3-pole
Mounting plate rotated 90° Breaker C
L Breaker
t max.=3.2 3-pole C
L C
L
C
L
Connection
8
C
L C
L
144
1
allowance L
126
144
52
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 35 32.5
15 6 mounting screw ø24
35 35
15 100
φ9 70 M4×0.7
Insulating
M8 bolt 70 screw
tube 105 1mm clearance
68 71 105 or φ5
on each side
72 106 3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
of handle
Front-plate cutout
6
Plug-in
L
C
L C
L
Connection
allowance
58.5
C
L
144
C
L
54
80
200
14
22
70
6
58.5
153
28
15
M6 70 105
Terminal block φ7
18 20
mounting screw φ9 107 142
M8 bolt
Stud attachable in this
86 32 direction only 3-pole 4-pole
70 Insulating barrier
Drilling plan
124
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
125–225 125–225
Rated current In (Amp.)
Adjustable Adjustable
Number of poles 3 4 3 4
100–440 100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽1)
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500 (30) 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button
2min
(at 200%) 1min
1min 30s
Operating time
30s
20s 10s
10s 5s
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Is
5s pickup current IP Ir ×(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 2s
Ir ×(0.70-0.75 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
2s -0.8-0.85-0.9 1s
-0.95-1.0) ±10% Inertial
1s 0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
STD operating time Ts
0.5s Pre-alarm 0.2s nonoperating time
operating time TP 0.3 ± 0.06s
TL 0.1s
0.2s TP = ±20% 0.2 ± 0.04s Inertial
2
0.1s (at 200%) 0.1 ± 0.03s 0.04s nonoperating time
0.06 ± 0.02s 0.02s
0.05s
Max.total breaking 0.01s
INST pickup current Il time
0.02s In×(4~16) ±15%
0.01s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Current setting Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
110
100
90
(✽1)
80
device
LC LC-2SW Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (✽2)
ZCT
Handle lock (✽1) HLF-2SW Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (✽2) 70
80 CT
Load side
CT
Note (✽1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. Leakage
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. indication button
(✽3) Specify the working voltage.
125
Front connection
Insulating barrier M8 bolt 24 Note: The setting of selector is available by openning the upper cover.
(removable) (Hex-soket)
Leakage indicator Breaker
Mounting hole
30
button
100
Current indication LED
126
144
165
50
Operating Wire connection
Trip time selector
button (for time-delay type)
ø8.5
Test button
100
ø4.5
45 35 35
φ8.5
10
Test 22 Operating 35 Neutral 61
cover
characteristics pole M4×0.7 taps
70 selector 68 23max. or φ5
105
Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
Insulating 3-pole
tube Stud can be 3-pole
Mounting plate Breaker
t max.=3.2 rotated 90° Breaker
8
Connection
126
144
144
R1
allowance
52
22
20
M4×0.7
ø24 35 32.5
15 6 breaker
mounting screw
35 35
15 φ9 70 M4×0.7
100
M8 bolt taps
Insulating 70 or φ5
68 71 105
105 tube
1mm clearance
72 106 3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole on each side
of handle
Front-plate cutout 6
Plug-in
58.5
22
200
54
80
144
14
70
6
153
58.5
15
28
M6 70
20 φ7 105
18 Terminal block
mounting screw φ9 107 142
70
M8 bolt
86 32
126
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40
Rated current In (Amp.) (✽1)
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100
Number of poles 3
100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽2)
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
Note (✽1) The Time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
(✽2) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Operating time
Operating time
2min 2min 2min
Max.(40A~50A) Max.
1min 1min 1min
Max.
30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
30min
type mounting mounting
120
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
10min
Rated nonoperating current
2min
1min Lead wire
Operating time
Load side
127
Front connection
Mounting hole
Breaker
M8 screw
24
C
L
C
L
Sensitivity current
selector
61
Operating time
(✽1) 171-172
selector
C C
191
L L
(time-delay type)
173
φ8.5
130
84
50
Leakage
8
indication button
Test button
30
Trip 22 45
19 max.
button
60 61
M4×7 taps or
90 68 (Conductor thickness t=5 max.) 5mm-dia. hole
4 72
Conductor drilling for direct connection
90 Drilling plan
Rear connection
Mounting plate
102 Stud rotatble
t=3.2 max. Breaker
by 90°
52
C
L C
L Breaker
4.5
C
L
(✽1) 171-172
C C
L
173
L
Mounting base
R1
52
173
C
L
Connection
8
15 allowance
16
30 φ18
86
8.5
5 60
2.5 M8 bolt M4×0.7 M4×7 taps or
60 5mm-dia. hole
breaker
15 2.5 mounting screw
1.0mm clearance on each
68 54.5 15 side of the handle frame.
6
Insulation
72 104.5 tube Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
Plug-in
M5×0.8
Terminal block mounting screw Breaker
Mounting plate
(plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in terminal C
L C
L
block
56
11
5.5 20
C
L C
L C
L
159
251
16.5 max.
195
115
155
12
56
21 60 12.5 30
φ8.5 6mm-dia. hole
89 30 M8 screw 95 97 or M5× 0.8 taps
Drilling plan
Note (✽1) It can respond to the attachment size of 171 and 172 both sides.
128
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 3
100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽1)
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
10min
Rated nonoperating current
6min 4min
Rated current sensitivity
Rated nonoperating current
4min 2min
Operating time
2min 1min
Operating time
Max.
1min 30s
30s
20s 10s
5s
10s
5s 2s
Min. 1s
2s
0.5s Inertial
1s Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s nonoperating time
0.5s
0.1s
0.2s Inertial
Max.total 0.04s nonoperating time
0.1s breaking time
0.02s
0.05s 0.01s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
×100% of Rated current
120
Lead wire
AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM direction 110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
Remark 1. Refer to page 48.
Load side
Electrical
operation device — —
Leakage
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. indication button
(✽2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
129
Front connection
M8 bolt
Insulating barrier (Hex-socket)
Mounting hole (removable)
24 Breaker
C
L
28
C
100
L
Solderless terminal
for wire size
75
Sensitivity selector
75
125~175A 14~95mm2
200~225A 70~125mm2
Operating time selector
C (for time-delay type) Wire connection C
L L
201
240
219
165
165
102
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
Leakage indication
button
10
100
45
φ8.5
Test button
35
Trip 61 23 max
22 M4×0.7 screw
Button or φ5
68
70 (Bus t max.=7) Drilling plan
4 72
Bus drilling for
105
direct connection
92
Rear connection
Insulating Breaker
Stud can be
Mounting plate tube C
L
rotated 90° Breaker
t max.=3.2 C
L
73
11.5
C
L
108 C
L
C
L C
L 1
201
219
52
R
219
Connection
allowance
22
20
100
15 6 M4×0.7 35
breaker ø24
15 70 mounting screw
φ9 70
M4×0.7 1mm clearance
M8 bolt
68 71 screw on each side
6
Insulating
tube or φ5 of handle
72 106
Front-plate cutout
Drilling plan
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal
Mounting plate Breaker (Terminal block)
block
34.5
C
L
C
L
Connection
58.5
22 allowance
C
L C
L
129
155
275
219
15
14
70
153
6
58.5
28
20 φ9
70 φ7
18 M8 bolt
M6
Terminal block 70 107
86 32 Insulating
mounting screw Stud attachable in this barrier
direction only
Drilling plan
130
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
2h
Types 4h
1h
NV400-CW High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
NV400-SW speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
30min 1h
type
30s
1min
Operating time
Max. 10s
30s 5s
20s
2s
10s 1s
NV400-CW Inertial
5s 0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
Min. 0.2s
nonoperating time
2s 0.1s
Inertial
1s 0.04s
nonoperating time
NV400-SW 0.02s
0.5s 0.01s
0.2s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
0.1s (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Max. total breaking time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Load side
131
Front connection
16
110
t=8 max.
CL Breaker
43
39
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector
R6
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
92
CL
102
257
194
CL
12
CL
Leakage indication button 47
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button Test button
25
39
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44 M6 tap or ø7 118
44 Conductor drilling for direct connection
ø14 97
M12 bolt 103 1.0mm clearance on each
51 5 107 side of the handle frame.
112
140
155(NV400-SP) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134(NV400-CP)
Line side
Breaker
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°C Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent 6-ø35
C
L
8
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 ø35 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13 M12 bolt Add these tapped holes in
113 87 87 44
Insulation tube 8 positions to standard boring.
87
6
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in
55
M8 terminal block
280
225
163
135
79
55
160
28
ø10
15
18 28 Stud attachable in 44
this direction only
121 136
87
Insulating barrier
ø13 M12 bolt
Drilling plan
132
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
2s
30s 1s
20s 0.5s Inertial
Inertial nonoperating time
10s 0.2s
Pre-alarm nonoperating time
STD pickup current Is 0.1s
5s pickup current Ip Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4- Inertial
Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.8- 5-6-7-8-10) ±15% 0.04s
0.85-0.9-0.95
nonoperating time
2s 0.02s
-1.0) ±10%
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts
0.5s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
operating time Tp
TL 0.3 ± 0.06 s Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
Tp= ±20% (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04 s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03 s
0.06 ± 0.02 s
0.05s
Rated ambient
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: 1. Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. Ambient temperature (°C)
2. Refer to page 50 and 51.
Load side
Electrical operation CT
71
device
CT
Note (✽1) This is for NV400-SEW. Magnetic Sensitivity
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. device selector
94.5 4-pole
Insulating barrier (removable)
CL 3-pole
28 44
Conductor thickness 8
t=8 max. Breaker
16
CL
110
CL Breaker CL
43
Sensitivity current
selector
39
Operating time selector
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
R6
257
102
194
92
CL
12
Leakage indication CL CL
59
ø12.5
button
ø7
Trip button Test button
25
39
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Neutral pole Conductor drilling for direct connection 44 M6 tap or ø7 44
44 118
ø14 97
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each
112 185 side of the handle frame.
155
140 196 3-pole 4-pole
Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 11 11
44 ø35
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped holes in
113 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
M12 bolt 8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 87
130.5
6
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal block Mounting plate 3-pole C
L Breaker C
L
C
L
35
55
Connection
M8 terminal block
280
225
163
135
CL allowance C
L
24 mounting screw
24
8
79
55
160
28
ø10
15
18 28 Stud attachable
44 87
in this direction only
121 136 181
ø13 87
Insulating barrier
M12 bolt
130.5
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
134
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
2h
1h Types 4h
NV630-CW NV630-SW High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
30min speed
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
20min type
1min 30s
Max.
30s 10s
5s
Operating time
20s
2s
10s
1s
5s
0.5s Inertial
Min. Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
2s nonoperating time
0.1s
1s Inertial
0.04s
nonoperating time
0.5s 0.02s
0.01s
0.2s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.1s Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
Max. total breaking time (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
135
Front connection
94.5
28 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
Bus t max.=10 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Sensitivity Breaker
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
R6
Leakage-indicator 59 ø10.5
92
button
Trip 30
ø7
button Test button
39
Bus t max.=10
ø12.5
Bus drilling for 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral direct connection or ø7
Pole 44
97 118
ø14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal Mounting plate 3-pole
block Breaker
35
55
M8 Connection
280
225
135
163
93
55
160
28
ø10
20
18 30 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 ø13 110 136 181
M12 bolt
165.5 Insulating barrier
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Note: NV630-CW and NV630-SW is only the pole of 3.
136
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
5h 4h
Types High-
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
2h 1h
type
Rated nonoperating current
6min
80s(TL= 12s set) 30s
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20% 10s
(at 200%) 5s
1min
Operating time
2s
30s 1s
20s 0.5s Inertial
Inertial nonoperating time
10s 0.2s
nonoperating time
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Isd 0.1s
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 Inertial
Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% 0.04s
nonoperating time
2s -0.9-0.95-1.0)±10% 0.02s
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
TL
±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
INST pickup current II
0.02s In x(4~15) ±15%
Max.total
(Magnification to In) breaking time
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% to Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In)
Rated ambient
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: 1. Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached.
2. Refer to page 50 and 51.
Electrical operation CT
71
device
CT
Note (✽1) This is for NV630-SEW Magnetic Sensitivity
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. device selector
137
Front connection
94.5
28 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
Bus t max.=10 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Sensitivity Breaker
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
R6
Leakage-indicator 59 ø10.5
92
button
Trip 30
ø7
button Test button
39
Bus t max.=10
ø12.5
Bus drilling for 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral direct connection or ø7
Pole 44
97 118
ø14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
Plug-in
4-pole
Plug-in terminal Mounting plate 3-pole
block Breaker
35
55
M8 Connection
280
225
135
163
93
55
160
28
ø10
20
18 30 Stud attachable in 44 87
this direction only
121 ø13 110 136 181
M12 bolt
165.5 Insulating barrier
3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Note: NV630-HEW is only the pole of 3.
138
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
5h 4h
Types High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
2h NV800-SEW NV800-HEW speed
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
type
Rated nonoperating current
2s
30s
1s
20s Inertial
0.5s
10s Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
STD pickup current Isd
nonoperating time
5s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip 0.1s
Ir × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4
Inertial
Ir × (0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15% 0.04s
nonoperating time
2s – 0.9 – 0.95 – 1.0) ±10% 0.02s
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp
0.5s TL STD operating time Ts 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Tp= ±20%
2
0.3 ± 0.06s
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(at 200%) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 0.2 ± 0.04s
Current (% to Ir)
■Current reducing curve
Working current correcting ratio (%)
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
page page
Load side
CT
Terminal cover
139
Front connection
26
Insulating barrier (removable) 94.5
Mounting hole 46 Breaker
Breaker
Conductor thickness
110
t=12 max.
87
32
8 R6
Sensitivity current selector Terminal dimension for directly
connecting conductor
92
243
Operating time selector
(Time-delay type)
275
102 15
32
ø8
12
172
32 8
M6 tap or ø7
ø14
8 70
87
46 22
Test button
15
51
97 40
14 1.0mm clearance on each
103 side of the handle frame.
40
Trip button 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
140 Conductor drilling for direct connection Front-panel cutout
155 Drilling plan
210
Connection
allowance 6-ø48
M6 tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
5
25
24 24
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
10
5
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
10
243
243
295
12.5
24 24
13
45
11 11 8-M4 screw
10 8 Add these tapped holes in
M6 screw for 70
8 32 15 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
140 mounting breaker
ø13 140
113 110 M12 bolt 140
6
Drilling plan
Plug-in
155
187
20
301
243
13
56
10
112
32
25
70
15
23 ø10
40
M8 terminal block mounting screw 208
126 ø13
140
M12 bolt
Drilling plan
140
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
Type NV63-SW
Max. 30s
Operating time
1min
30s 10s
20s 5s
10s 2s
1s
5s
0.5s
2s 0.2s
Min.
1s 0.1s
0.5s 0.04s
0.02s
0.2s 0.01s
0.1s
25 50 100 500 1000
0.05s
Ground-fault current
0.02s (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Operating handle
Left-side Right-side 300
Rated ambient
250
mounting mounting
200
AL AX UVT
150
Lead wire
TBM 100
direction 80
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: 1. Refer to page 52.
Ambient temperature (°C)
Operating handle
Line side
Leakage
Note (✽1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock. indication button
141
Front connection
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 63A)
111
111
130
50
84
φ4.5
φ8.5
6
22 Leakage
Trip button 45 25 M4×0.7 taps
indicaton button
12.5 max. or 5mm dia.hole
50 Test button 61
(Conductor thickness
68 t=5 max.)
75
4 72 Conductor drilling
Drilling plan
for direct connection
90
Rear connection
1
R
52
8
111
φ14
70
M4×0.7 screw
50 for mounting breaker 25
M4×0.7 taps
27 min.
M6 screw 1.0mm clearance on each side of
50
or 5mm-dia.hole
the handle frame.
68
72 42
6
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
142
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h 2h
Types
1h NV125-CW 63A~100A 1h Types 1h Types 1h Types
NV125-SW 40A~100A NV125-SW 16A~20A NV125-CW 125A NV125-SW 32A
30min NV125-HW 40A~100A 30min 30min 30min
NV125-HW 16A~20A NV125-SW 125A NV125-HW 32A
20min 20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A)
Operating time
Operating time
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
2min 2min 2min 2min
Max. (40A~50A) Max.
1min 1min 1min 1min
Max.
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
Min. Min. Min.
Min.
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
AL AX
Rated nonoperating current
10min UVT
110
Rated current sensitivity
Lead wire
Rated current sensitivity
4min
TBM
Rated nonoperating current
2min
Rated current sensitivity
10s 90
5s
2s 80
1s –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Inertial
0.5s nonoperating time
Inertial
0.2s nonoperating time
Ambient temperature (°C)
0.1s
Inertial
0.04s nonoperating time
0.02s Remark: 1. refer to page 52.
0.01s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Load side
Electrical
MDS-NV1SWE (✽2) 71 Leakage
operation device
indication button
Note (✽1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(✽2) Specify the working voltage.
(✽3) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
143
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable) Solderless terminal
for wire size
Mounting hole C
L 14~2/0AWG CU/AL
M8 screw Breaker
24
C
L C C
50
(*1) 110-111
C
L (time-delay type) (time-delay type) C
L
130
112
50
84
Leakage Leakage Wire connection
indication button indication button
ø8.5
Trip 22 Trip 30 45 30 30
button Neutral pole
button
8
60 90 61 M4×0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia. hole
68
90 120
19 max.
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
90
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
4-pole 4-pole
Mounting base Breaker
3-pole 3-pole C
L
102 C
L C
L
Mounting plate Breaker
52 Stud rotatable C
L
t=3.2 max.
by 90°
(*1) 110-111
C
L
112
Connection C
L 1
R
52
8
C allowance
112
L
15
16
30
28
30 φ18 30
8.5
5 M4×0.7 86
60 90
M8 bolt breaker
2.5 60 mounting screw
M4×0.7 taps or
15 2.5 90 5mm-dia. hole
Insulation
68 54.5 15 tube 1.0mm clearance on each side
3-pole 4-pole of the handle frame.
6
72 104.5
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
Note (✽1) It can respond to the attachment size of 110 and 111 both sides.
Remark: 1. NV125-CW is available in 3-pole only.
144
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
NV250-HW Rated current In (Amp.)
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 4
100–440 100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽1)
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30, 100 • 200 • 500 30, 100 • 200 • 500 30, 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable Selectable Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable Selectable Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button Button Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 15/8 25/13 50/13
breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V 18/9 30/15 50/13
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
EN 60947-2 AC230V 35/18 50/25 100/25
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type NV250-SW Note (✽1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
10min
Max.
Operating time
1min
1min
30s
30s
20s
10s
10s 5s
5s
2s
Min.
2s 1s
1s Inertial
0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
0.5s 250A 0.2s nonoperating time
0.2s 125~ Max.total 0.1s
225A breaking time Inertial
0.1s
0.04s nonoperating time
0.05s 0.02s
0.02s 0.01s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
130
Left-side Right-side AL AX
Curreny rating (%)
100
90
(✽1) 80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note (✽1) Refer to page 52.
(rated ambient 40°C)
handle
Load side
Electrical
MDS-NV2SWE (✽3) 71
operation device
Leakage
Note (✽1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
indication button
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(✽3) Specify the working voltage.
145
Front connection
30
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier M8 bolt
24
(removable) (Hex-soket)
Trip button C
L Breaker
Solderless terminal
100
C
L for wire size C
L C
L
Sensitivity
selector 125~175A 14~95mm2
200~250A 70~125mm2
Wire connection
Operating time
C
L C
L
126
144
165
102
selector
50
(for time-delay
φ4.5
type)
φ8.5
Leakage
100
45
indication
φ8.5
35 35
10
button
61
22 35 M4×0.7 screw
Neutral or φ5
Test button
pole 68
70 105 23 max.
4 72 3-pole 4-pole
105 140 (Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection Drilling plan
92
3-pole 4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Insulating tube
Stud can be 4-pole 3-pole
Mounting plate rotated 90° Breaker C
L Breaker
t max.=3.2 3-pole C
L C
L
C
L
Connection
8
C
L C
L
144
1
allowance L
126
144
52
22
20
M4×0.7
breaker 35 32.5
15 6 mounting screw ø24
35 35
15 100
φ9 70 M4×0.7
Insulating
M8 bolt 70 screw
tube 105 1mm clearance
68 71 105 or φ5
on each side
72 106 3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
of handle
Front-plate cutout
6
Remark: 1. NV250-CW are available in 3-pole only.
146
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40
Rated current In (Amp.)
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100
Number of poles 3
100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽2)
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 125/125
breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V 125/125
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
EN 60947-2 AC230V 125/125
Standard Attached Parts Mounting screw : M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Type NV125-RW (Front connection) Insulation barrier : (3P:4pcs, 4P:6pcs)
Note (✽1) The Time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
Note (✽2) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Operating time
Operating time
2min 2min 2min
Max.(40A~50A) Max.
1min 1min 1min
Max.
30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
30min
type mounting mounting
120
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
10min
Rated nonoperating current
2min
1min Lead wire
Operating time
TBM 100
30s direction
10s 90
5s
2s 80
1s –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Inertial
0.5s nonoperating time
Inertial
0.2s nonoperating time Ambient temperature (°C)
0.1s
Inertial
0.04s nonoperating time
0.02s
0.01s
Load side
Operating handle
S S1SW 68 Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3 (✽1) 70
Mechanical interlock MI MI-05SW3 (✽1) 79 Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (✽1)
Electrical operation device — — Plug-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (✽1)
Magnetic Senstivity
LC LC-1SW device selector
147
Front connection
Mounting hole
Breaker
M8 screw
24
C
L
C
L
Sensitivity current
selector
61
Operating time
(✽1) 171-172
selector
C C
191
L L
(time-delay type)
173
φ8.5
130
84
50
Leakage
8
indication button
Test button
30
Trip 22 45
19 max.
button
60 61
M4×7 taps or
90 68 (Conductor thickness t=5 max.) 5mm-dia. hole
4 72
Conductor drilling for direct connection
90 Drilling plan
Rear connection
Mounting plate
102 Stud rotatble
t=3.2 max. Breaker
by 90°
52
C
L C
L Breaker
4.5
C
L
(✽1) 171-172
C C
L
173
L
Mounting base
R1
52
173
C
L
Connection
8
15 allowance
16
30 φ18
86
8.5
5 60
2.5 M8 bolt M4×0.7 M4×7 taps or
60 5mm-dia. hole
breaker
15 2.5 mounting screw
1.0mm clearance on each
68 54.5 15 side of the handle frame.
Insulation
72 104.5 tube Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout 6
Note (✽1) It can respond to the attachment size of 171 and 172 both sides.
148
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
Number of poles 3
100–440
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (✽1)
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s) 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Selectable
Time-delay type 0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system Button
Rated short-circuit AC440V 125/125
breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V 125/125
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
EN 60947-2 AC230V 125/125
10min
Rated nonoperating current
6min 4min
Rated current sensitivity
Rated nonoperating current
4min 2min
Operating time
2min 1min
Operating time
Max.
1min 30s
30s
20s 10s
5s
10s
5s 2s
Min. 1s
2s
0.5s Inertial
1s Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s nonoperating time
0.5s
0.1s
0.2s Inertial
Max.total 0.04s nonoperating time
0.1s breaking time
0.02s
0.05s 0.01s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
×100% of Rated current
120
Lead wire
AL AX UVT TBM direction 110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
Remark: 1. Refer to page 52.
Load side
Electrical
operation device — —
Leakage
Note (✽1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. indication button
(✽2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
149
Front connection
M8 bolt
Insulating barrier (Hex-socket)
Mounting hole (removable)
24 Breaker
C
L
28
C
100
L
Solderless terminal
for wire size
75
Sensitivity selector
75
125~175A 14~95mm2
200~225A 70~125mm2
Operating time selector
C (for time-delay type) Wire connection C
L L
201
240
219
165
165
102
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
Leakage indication
button
10
100
45
φ8.5
Test button
35
Trip 61 23 max
22 M4×0.7 screw
Button or φ5
68
70 (Bus t max.=7) Drilling plan
4 72
Bus drilling for
105
direct connection
92
Rear connection
Insulating Breaker
Stud can be
Mounting plate tube C
L
rotated 90° Breaker
t max.=3.2 C
L
73
11.5
C
L
108 C
L
C
L C
L 1
201
219
52
R
219
Connection
allowance
22
20
100
15 6 M4×0.7 35
breaker ø24
15 70 mounting screw
φ9 70
M4×0.7 1mm clearance
M8 bolt
68 71 screw on each side
Insulating
72 106
tube or φ5 of handle
Front-plate cutout
6
Drilling plan
150
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
2h
Types 4h
1h
NV400-CW High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
NV400-SW speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
30min 1h
type
30s
1min
Operating time
Max. 10s
30s 5s
20s
2s
10s 1s
NV400-CW Inertial
5s 0.5s
Inertial nonoperating time
Min. 0.2s
nonoperating time
2s 0.1s
Inertial
1s 0.04s
nonoperating time
NV400-SW 0.02s
0.5s 0.01s
0.2s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
0.1s (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Max. total breaking time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Load side
151
Front connection
16
110
t=8 max.
CL Breaker
43
39
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector
R6
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
92
CL
102
257
194
CL
12
CL
Leakage indication button 47
ø12.5
ø7
Trip button Test button
25
39
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44 M6 tap or ø7 118
44 Conductor drilling for direct connection
ø14 97
M12 bolt 103 1.0mm clearance on each
51 5 107 side of the handle frame.
112
140
155(NV400-SP) Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
134(NV400-CP)
Line side
Breaker
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°C Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent 6-ø35
C
L
8
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 ø35 11 11
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13 M12 bolt Add these tapped holes in
113 87 87 44
Insulation tube 8 positions to standard boring.
87
Drilling plan
6
Load side
152
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
2s
30s 1s
20s 0.5s Inertial
Inertial nonoperating time
10s 0.2s
Pre-alarm nonoperating time
STD pickup current Is 0.1s
5s pickup current Ip Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4- Inertial
Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.8- 5-6-7-8-10) ±15% 0.04s
0.85-0.9-0.95
nonoperating time
2s 0.02s
-1.0) ±10%
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm STD operating time Ts
0.5s 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
operating time Tp
TL 0.3 ± 0.06 s Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
Tp= ±20% (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04 s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03 s
0.06 ± 0.02 s
0.05s
Rated ambient
110
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) can be attached. Ambient temperature (°C)
2. Refer to page 53.
Load side
Electrical operation CT
71
device
CT
Note (✽1) This is for NV400-SEW. Magnetic Sensitivity
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. device selector
94.5 4-pole
Insulating barrier (removable)
CL 3-pole
28 44
Conductor thickness 8
t=8 max. Breaker
16
CL
110
CL Breaker CL
43
Sensitivity current
selector
39
Operating time selector
Mounting hole (Time-delay type)
R6
257
102
194
92
CL
12
Leakage indication CL CL
59
ø12.5
button
ø7
Trip button Test button
25
39
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Neutral pole Conductor drilling for direct connection 44 M6 tap or ø7 44
44 118
ø14 97
M12 bolt 56 103
51 168 5 107 1.0mm clearance on each
112 185 side of the handle frame.
155
140 196 3-pole 4-pole
Front-panel cutout
3-pole 4-pole Drilling plan
24 24
8
Connection M6 tap or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
225
265
194
225
CL C
14
L
25 20 20
26
83
128
24 24
M6 screw for
mounting breaker 44 11 11
44 ø35
10 8 8-M4 screw
ø13 Add these tapped holes in
113 87 Insulation tube 87 43.5 44
M12 bolt 8 positions to standard boring.
130.5 87
130.5
6
Drilling plan
154
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
2h
1h Types 4h
NV630-CW NV630-SW High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
30min speed
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
20min type
Rated nonoperating current
1min 30s
Max.
30s 10s
5s
Operating time
20s
2s
10s
1s
5s
0.5s Inertial
Min. Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
2s nonoperating time
0.1s
1s Inertial
0.04s
nonoperating time
0.5s 0.02s
0.01s
0.2s
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
0.1s Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
Max. total breaking time (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current
100
90
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
155
Front connection
94.5
28 44
4-pole
Insulating barrier Bus t max.=10 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Sensitivity Breaker
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
R6
Leakage-indicator 59 ø10.5
92
button
Trip 30
ø7
button Test button
39
Bus t max.=10
ø12.5
Bus drilling for 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral direct connection or ø7
Pole 44
97 118
ø14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
6
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
156
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
5h 4h
Types High-
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW 2h Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
speed 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
2h 1h
type
6min
80s(TL= 12s set) 30s
4min
LTD operating time TL
2min 12-60-100-150s ±20% 10s
(at 200%) 5s
1min
Operating time
2s
30s 1s
20s 0.5s Inertial
Inertial nonoperating time
10s 0.2s
nonoperating time
Pre-alarm STD pickup current Isd 0.1s
5s pickup current Ip Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4 Inertial
Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85 -5-6-7-8-10) ±15% 0.04s
nonoperating time
2s -0.9-0.95-1.0)±10% 0.02s
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm
0.5s operating time Tp STD operating time Ts 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
TL
±20% 0.3 ± 0.06s
Tp= (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 2 0.2 ± 0.04s
(at 200%)
0.1s 0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.05s
INST pickup current II
0.02s In x(4~15) ±15%
Max.total
(Magnification to In) breaking time
0.01s
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (% to Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In)
Rated ambient
110
100
90
80
Electrical operation CT
71
device
CT
Note (✽1) This is for NV630-SEW Magnetic Sensitivity
(✽2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page. device selector
157
Front connection
94.5
28 44
Insulating barrier 4-pole
Bus t max.=10 8
(removable)
16
3-pole
110
Breaker
43
Sensitivity Breaker
selector
39
Operating-time
12
Mounting selector
194
hole (time-delay type)
257
102
R6
Leakage-indicator 59 ø10.5
92
button
Trip 30
ø7
button Test button
39
Bus t max.=10
ø12.5
Bus drilling for 44 M6 screw 44
Neutral direct connection or ø7
Pole 44
97 118
ø14
M12 bolt 56 103 3-pole 4-pole
51 168 5 107 1mm clearance on each
side of handle
112 185 155 Drilling plan
140 196 Front-plate cutout
3-pole 4-pole
24 24
8
M6 screw
Connection or ø7
allowance 4-M6 tap or ø7
225
265
194
225
194
225
14
25 20 20
32
83
128
24 24
M6
breaker mounting
screw 44 ø35 44
10 8 11 11
8-M4 screw
ø13
113 87 Insulated tube 87 43.5 Add these tapped holes in
M12 bolt 44
8 positions to standard boring.
130.5
130.5 87
3-pole 4-pole
Load side
Drilling plan
158
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers for CE Marking
5h 4h
Types High- Time-delay type Time-delay type Time-delay type
2h
2h NV800-SEW NV800-HEW speed
1h 0.45s. (MAX) 1s. (MAX) 2s. (MAX)
type
Rated nonoperating current
2s
30s
1s
20s Inertial
0.5s
10s Inertial nonoperating time
0.2s
STD pickup current Isd
nonoperating time
5s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip 0.1s
Ir × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4
Inertial
Ir × (0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15% 0.04s
nonoperating time
2s – 0.9 – 0.95 – 1.0) ±10% 0.02s
0.01s
1s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp
0.5s TL STD operating time Ts 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Tp= ±20%
2
0.3 ± 0.06s
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(at 200%) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s 0.2 ± 0.04s
Current (% to Ir)
■Current reducing curve
Working current correcting ratio (%)
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Remark: 1. Instead of TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
2. Refer to page 53. ■Internal Wiring Diagram
Test button
Characteristic
setting part
page page
Load side
CT
Terminal cover
159
Front connection
26
Insulating barrier (removable) 94.5
Mounting hole 46 Breaker
Breaker
Conductor thickness
110
t=12 max.
87
32
8 R6
Sensitivity current selector Terminal dimension for directly
connecting conductor
92
243
Operating time selector
(Time-delay type)
275
102 15
32
ø8
12
172
32 8
M6 tap or ø7
ø14
8 70
87
46 22
Test button
15
51
97 40
14 1.0mm clearance on each
103 side of the handle frame.
40
Trip button 5 107 (Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
140 Conductor drilling for direct connection Front-panel cutout
155 Drilling plan
210
Connection
allowance 6-ø48
M6 tap or ø7 Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
5
25
24 24
Mounting plate Stud can be rotated 90° Breaker
10
5
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
10
243
243
295
12.5
24 24
13
45
11 11 8-M4 screw
10 8 Add these tapped holes in
M6 screw for 70
8 32 15 ø48 70 8 positions to standard boring.
140 mounting breaker
ø13 140
113 110 M12 bolt 140
6
Drilling plan
160
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 2 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 240
Rated short-circuit
AC 240V 14
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600
500V 7.5/4
IEC 60947-2
440V 7.5/4
(Icu/Ics) AC
400V 7.5/4
230V 15/8
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs)
Type NF50-SWU
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h Type
NF50-SWU
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Max.
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Operating handle
Left-side Right-side AL AX Lead wire
SHT or UVT 300
mounting mounting direction
Rated ambient
250
200
150
2-pole
100
80
70
3-pole
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F-05SUL2
F Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
F-05SUL
Operating handle V-05SUL2
V
V-05SUL
Terminal
Large TC-L TCL-05SWU2
S S05SWU cover TCL-05SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-05SWU
161
Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable)
φ5.5
C
L C
L
24
M5×0.8 screw
6
(M6 for 63A)
Mounting hole
50
12.5 max.
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
C
L
84
50
150
111
Conductor drilling
φ8.5
for direct connection
φ4.5
Trip button
45
50 61
25 22 68
4 72
50 50
90
75
2-pole 3-pole
Breaker
C
L C
L CL CL Breaker
1
R
52
C CL
111
25 50 70
6
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.
162
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 2 3 2 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 240 480Y/277
capacities (kA)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 690
690V – 8/4
500V 7.5/4 18/9
IEC 60947-2 AC 440V 10/5 25/13
(Icu/Ics)
400V 10/5 30/15
230V 30/15 50/25
DC 250V 7.5/4 15/8
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Type NF100-SWU
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h
2h 2h
1h Types 1h Type
NF100-CWU 50A~100A
30min NF100-SWU 40A~100A 30min NF100-SWU 15A~30A
20min 20min
14min 14min
10min 10min
6min 6min
4min 4min
Max. (60A~100A)
2min 2min
Max. (40A,50A)
1min 1min
Max.
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Min.
Min.
2s 2s
1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s
0.02s 0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s 0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70
AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting mounting direction
120
Current rating (%)
110
2-pole
100
90
3-pole
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F-1SUL2
F Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
F-1SUL
Operating handle V-1SUL2
V
V-1SUL
Terminal TCL-1SWU2
S S1SWU Large TC-L
cover TCL-1SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-1SWU
163
Front connection (Standard)
Insulation barrier
C
L
(removable)
φ8.5
Mounting M8 screw
50
hole 24
C
L
8
19 max.
C
L C
L
150
112
(Conductor thickness
50
84
t=5 max)
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Trip
45
button
50
61
22
68
30
60
4 72
60 90 90
2-pole 3-pole
Solderless terminal
C
L C
L
3
5.0
C
L C
L
Hexagon socket set screw
wire size
14~1/0AWG CU/AL
2-pole 3-pole
2-pole 3-pole 62
C
L C
L Breaker C
L C
L Breaker 30
30
1 (Insulation plate)
R
110-111
C
L C
L C
L C
L
52
(Line)
CAUTION:
When mounted in steel or cast box
cover must be insulated as shown.
M4×0.7 taps or 30mm air gap to cover or
57 86 0.8mm fibre insulating plate
5mm-dia. hole
30 extending 12.7mm out from
1.0mm clearance on each each side of breaker.
side of the handle frame.
2-pole 3-pole
164
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 3
capacities (kA)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600
500V 10/5
IEC 60947-2 440V 15/8
AC
(Icu/Ics) 400V 18/9
230V 35/18
DC 250V 10/5 (✽1)
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Terminal cover: (1 set), (✽2)
Note (✽1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can
Type NF225-CWU be used for up to 400 V DC.
(✽2) The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger
protection) structure.
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h Type
30min NF225-CWU
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Max.
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
Max. total
0.2s
breaking
0.1s time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
130
Operating handle
Curreny rating (%)
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-2SUL
Mechanical interlock Ml MI-05SWU3
Operating handle V V-2SUL
S S2SWU Terminal
Large TC-L TCL-2SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-2SWU cover
165
Front connection
Insulating barrier
24
C
L
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
Mounting hole
100
C
L
102
144
165
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
Trip button
100
22 45
70 61
105 68
4 72
92
C
L Breaker C
L Breaker
φ8.5
1
R
C
L C
L
126
52
10
22 max.
Bus t max.=7
166
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
capacities (kA)
240V 65 65 100
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 690 690
690V 8/8 8/8 15/15
500V 30/30 30/30 36/36
IEC 60947-2
440V 36/36 36/36 50/50
(Icu/Ics) AC
400V 36/36 36/36 50/50
230V 85/85 85/85 100/100
DC 250V (✽1) 20/20 20/20 20/20
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Standard attached parts Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Note (✽1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can be used for up to 500 V DC.
Type NF-SFW
■Operating Characteristics
4h 4h 4h
2h 2h 2h
Type Type Type
1h 1h 1h
NF-SFW NF-SFW NF-SJW/HJW
30min 15A~40A 30min 50A~150A 30min 125A~250A
20min 20min 20min
14min 14min 14min
10min 10min 10min
Max. Instantaneous trip
6min 6min Max.(60A~150A) 6min adjustment range
4min 4min 4min Position AC
Max.(40A) Max.(50A) of notch x In (%)
2min 2min 2min 4 400±80
6 600
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
1min 1min 1min 8 800
Max.(15A~30A)
30s 30s 30s 10 1000±200
20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s
Min.
5s 5s 5s
Min. Min.
2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s
(60A~150A)
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
(50A)
Adjustable range
Max. total Max. total Max. total
0.2s breaking 0.2s breaking 0.2s breaking
time time time
0.1s 0.1s 0.1s
Left-side Right-side
Current rating (%)
AL AX
mounting mounting 120
Lead wire
SHT or UVT direction 110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: 1. Refer to page 54. (rated ambient 40°C)
167
Front connection (Standard)
Insulating barrier
(removable) Hex.socket head 24
CAUTION:
M8 bolt
C
L Insulating barriers must be used
Mounting hole with uninsulated bus bars or
50
climp on terminals.
φ8.5
144
185
112
50
C
L
φ4.5
10
24 max.
ø8.5
22
50
63
35 4 86 4-FRONT
70 90
105 110
Mounting hole C
L
Hexagon socket set screw
6.1
112
144
185
50
C
L
Wire size
14AWG-250MCM CU/AL
ø8.5
φ4.5
63
Trip button
83
22 86
35 4 90
70 110
3-FRONT
105
C
L C
L
CAUTION:
Breaker Breaker When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
R1 26mm air gap to cover or extending 12.7mm
out fromeach side of breaker.
C C 62
126
52
L L
27
26
1.0mm clearance
on each side of
the handle frame.
35 M4×0.7 taps or 100
Insulation plate
5mm-dia. hole
(Line)
5-RIGHT
Drilling plan Front-panel cutout
168
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 600Y/347
capacities (kA)
240V 65
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
690V 10/10 (5/5) (✽1)
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30 (25/25) (✽1)
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42 (36/36) (✽1)
400V 45/45 (36/36) (✽1)
230V 85/85 (65/65) (✽1)
Note (✽1) In case of solderless ter minal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/).
Type NF-SKW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h Type
NF-SKW
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Operating time
1min
Max.
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s Max.total
interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
600
% of rated current
100
90
(✽1)
(✽1) (✽1)
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-4SUL Ter minal
Large TC-L TCL-4SKW
Operating handle V V-4SUL cover
S S4SKW
Handle lock device HL HL-4SP
169
Front connection (Solderless terminal)
Hexagon socket set screw
250~400A
Solderless terminal Tightening torque
275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
Mounting
8
hole
225
UL
257
102
47
Ampere ratings Wire size
250A, 300A 250-350MCM CU
φ12.5
φ7
Trip 250A 350MCM AL
button
350A, 400A 3/0AWG CU ONLY
IEC
87 97
Wire size (IEC 60228)
103 Ampere ratings
140 Class 2 Class 5
(max.141) 5 107 250A~350A 70~185mm2 95~185mm2
155 400A 150~240mm2 150~185mm2
Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×60 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Insulating barrier
(removable)
46
26 Bus t max. 10
t10
13
110
44
Mounting
hole
102
257
47
φ12.5
φ7
Trip
button
φ13 10
46
6
97
112
103
140
(max.141) 5 107
155
Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×60 (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
R6
92
97
30
58
1mm clearance on
44 7dia. holes 118 each side of handle. Insulating plate
or M6 taps
170
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Number of poles 3
Rated voltage (AC V) 600Y/347
capacities (kA)
240V 85
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
690V 10/10
IEC 60947-2 500V 30/30
(Icu/Ics) AC 440V 42/42
400V 45/45
230V 85/85
Type NF-SLW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h Type
NF-SLW
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min Inst. trip adjustment
4min range (4 steps)
Max.
1min Lo 400±100
2 600
30s
3 800
20s
Hi 1000±200
10s
5s
Adjustable range
Min. of inst. pick up
2s current
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s Max. total
interrupting time
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
600
% of rated current
100
90
(✽1) (✽1)
Note (✽1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name Accessories Type name
F F-6SUL Ter minal
cover Large TC-L TCL-6SLW
Operating handle V V-6SUL
S S4SKW
Handle lock device HL HL-4SP
171
Front connection (Solderless terminal)
Solderless termianl Hexagon socket set screw
243
275
102
8
15
UL
φ14
φ8
Trip
button Ampere ratings Wire size
500A, 600A 250-500MCM CU ONLY
140 97 IEC
Wire size (IEC 60228)
210 103 Ampere ratings
Class 2 Class 5
5 107 500A, 600A 95~185mm2 120~185mm2
155
Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×35 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Mounting
hole
102
275
15
φ14
Trip
φ8
button
8
6
87
14
32
10
15
40 46
140
97
φ14
210 103
5 107
Breaker Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
R6
92
97
30
58
1mm clearance on
Insulating plate
each side of handle.
70 7dia. holes 172
or M6 taps
172
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Miniature Circuit Breakers
BH Type BH BH-P
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
BH-P Rated current (A)
70 70, 100 70, 100 70 70, 100 70, 100
at ambient temperature 40°C
AC 230/400 230/400
Rated voltage (V)
DC 125 125
Rated ambient
Current rating (%)
14min
10min 120
6min 115
4min 70, 100A
110
2min 105
1min 100
95
30s
Operating time
20s 90
Max. 85
10s
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
71.5
74
M5 x 0.8
100
113
73
95
57
95
screw
Breaker
center
25 25 25 60.5
Mtg slot
25 50 57.5
25 50 75 65.5
25 50 75 Mtg hole ø4.5
63.5
77.5
22 47 47 20.5 45.5 70.5 79
Bus t max. =4
.5
ø5
6
5.5
12
4.5
14
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.
and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
173
BH-S Type BH-S M3 BH-S M6
Number of poles 1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated current (A) 5, 10, 15, 10, 15, 20, 15, 20, (25), 5, 10, 15, 10, 15, 20, 15, 20, (25),
20, (25), 30, (25), 30, 40, 30,40, 50, 20, (25), 30, (25), 30, 40, 30,40, 50,
at ambient temperature 40°C 40, 50, 60 50, 60 60 40, 50, 60 50, 60 60
AC 230/400 400 400 230/400 400 400
Rated voltage (V)
DC — 125 — — 125 —
Type BH-S
Rated ambient
1h 10A
Amb. temp.:40°C 125
20s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Type B Type C Type D
6
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
95
Bus t max. =4
ø5.5
5.5
12
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 13.5
Bus drilling
174
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Type BH-PS
Rated ambient
1h
Amb. temp.:40°C 125
2min 95
Max. 90
1min
85
30s
80
Operating time
20s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Type B Type C Type D
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
(line side)
57.5
71.5
81.5
25 25 25 60.5
25 50 75 65.5
M5 x 0.8 Mtg slot
screw 79
22 47 72
4.5
175
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
DIN Series
Type BH-D6
■Operating Characteristics
Min s Min s
200 200
10000 10000
Tripping Characteristics Tripping Characteristics
100 100
5000 5000
Type:BH-D6 Type:BH-D6
50 50
30 2000 Rated Current:6A-63A 30 2000 Rated Current:6A-63A
20 Amb. temp.:30°C 20 Amb. temp.:30°C
1000 1000
10 10
500 500
5 5
200 200
2 2
100 100
1 1
50 50
Max.
30 Max. 30
20 20
6-10A
10 10
13-63A
5 Min. 5
Tripping time
Tripping time
Min.
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 B C 0.2
0.1 0.1 D
0.05 0.05
Max total
0.02 tripping time 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
125
N N
120
Current ratings (%)
44.5
115
ambient
Rated
110
45
87
92
105
100
95
90
N N
85
-10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 18 18 36 18
Insulation
Ambient temperature (°C) 54 Barrier(Option)
18 36 36 54
72 17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
176
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
DIN Series
Type BH-DN
■Operating Characteristics
Min Sec
200
10000
Tripping Characteristics
100
5000
Type : BH-DN
50
2000 Rated current : 6A~20A
30
Amb.temp. : 30°C
20
1000
10
500
5
200
2
100
1
50
30 Max
20
10
5
Min
2
0.5
Tripping time
0.2
0.1
0.05 Max.total
tripping time
0.02
0.01
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
× Rated current
•BH-DN
M4 SCREW
8.4
18
N
45
17
70 maximum
44
Solderless Terminal
6
45
88
177
BV-D RCCB BV-D (IEC 61008)
Number of poles 2 (1+N) 4 (3+N)
Rated current (A)
25, 40, 63
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC) 230 230/400
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) 30, 300
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆ 0.04
Pulsating current sensitivity Type AC
Rated conditional short-cirrent (kA) 6
Type BV-D
■Operating Characteristics
2h
1h
30min
20min
10min
Rated nonoperating current sensitivity
6min
4min
2min
Rated current sensitivity
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
6
25 50 100 500
•BV-D Residual
M5 screw Test button indicator Neutral pole
N
42.5
45
85
18 17 44 6
18 54
70 maximum
36 72
Solderless terminal
2-pole 4-pole
178
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
DIN Series
Type BV-DN
Operating time
200 1min
30s
2
100
1 10s
50
5s
30 Max
20 2s
1s
10 0.5s
5 0.2s
Min 0.1s
2
0.04s
1 0.02s
0.01s
0.5
Tripping time
25 50 100 500
0.2
Ground-fault current
0.1 (% of rated current sensitivity)
Max.total
0.05 tripping time
0.02
0.01
0.6 0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
× Rated current
Residual indicator
45
17
70 maximum
44
6
45 Solderless
terminal
88
179
KB-D Isolating switch KB-D (IEC 60947-3)
Number of poles 1 2 3 4 (3+N)
Utilization category AC22A class
Rated current (A)
32, 63, 80
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC) 230 400
Shot time withstand current (A) 20 × In, 1s
Shot-circuit making capacity (A) 20 × In
Type KB-D
44.5
45
87
N 92
18 36 18
Insulation
54 Barrier(Option)
18 36 54
72 17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
6
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
180
6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Circuit Protectors
■Operating Characteristics
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S)
2h 2h 2h 2h
1h DC 1h 1h 1h
40min 40min DC 40min DC 40min DC
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
■Outside Dimension Diagram Medium type with inertial delay (MD) Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
2h 2h
•CP30-BA 1h
40min
1h
40min
Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal cover 22.5 IEC 35mm 10min 10min
6min 6min
cover cover cover rail 4min 4min
2min 2min
1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
20s 20s
22.5
ON ON ON 10s 10s
39
5s 5s
54
73
67
56
63
2s 2s
1s 1s
9.5
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
0.1s 0.1s
5.5
(3)
0.05s 0.05s
19
Mounting hole 0.02s 0.02s
9.5 9.5 9.5 ø4.5 31.5
0.01s 0.01s
63 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
17.5 17.5 17.5 125 400 700 125 400 700
65 3
17.5 35 52.5 Current (% of rated current) Current (% of rated current)
Terminal block of internal accessaries (AL, AX, SHT)
17.5 17.5
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M3.5
(Plus minus self-up screw)
(The figure shows auxiliary switch.
■Temperature Characteristics
AXb AXb AXb
AXc
12
AXc
12
AXc
12 Example: Auxiliary switch)
11 11 11
AXa
14
AXa
14
AXa
14 Main terminal
(Plus minus self-up screw)
M4·····20A max.
M5·····20A over 300
Operating time variation (%)
250
5
200
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
70
60
12 29.5 47 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
181
CP-S Frame (A) 30
Type CP-S
Number of poles 1 2 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 2.5
0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75
Rated current (A)
1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 7, 7.5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30
AC (V) 250 —
Rated voltage (V)
DC (V) 65 —
UL 1077
AC 1.5kA at 250V —
DC 1kA at 65V —
■Operating Characteristics
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S) Medium type with inertial delay (MD)
2h 2h 2h 2h 2h
1h 1h 1h 1h 1h
40min 40min 40min 40min 40min
20min 20min 20min 20min 20min
10min 10min 10min 10min 10min
6min 6min 6min 6min 6min
4min 4min 4min 4min 4min
2min 2min 2min 2min 2min
1min 1min 1min 1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s 30s 30s 30s
20s 20s 20s 20s 20s
10s 10s 10s 10s 10s
5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
2s 2s 2s 2s 2s
1s 1s 1s 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s 0.5s
2h
Fast type with inertial delay (FD)
2h
Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
6
1h 1h
40min 40min
Series <With auxiliary switch (AX), With series alarm switch (AL)> 1min 1min
Operating time
Operating time
30s 30s
Switch <With switch type auxiliary switch (AX)> 20s 20s
10s 10s
5s 5s
Main terminal
Mail tab terminal nominal 250 2s 2s
(8.35W × 0.8L) 1s 1s
0.5s 0.5s
0.2s 0.2s
LINE
0.1s 0.1s
0.05s 0.05s
11.5 8.8 7.3
39
0.02s 0.02s
0.01s 0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
125 400 700 125 400 700
LORD
Current Current
(% of rated current) (% of rated current)
40
Alarm · auxiliary switch terminal 49.5 3.3
Tab terminal nominal 110
55 18
(2.8W × 0.5L)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
■Temperature Characteristics
300
Operating time variation (%)
250
42
51
42
51
42
51
26.5
26.5
26.5
200
ø15 ø15 ø15
150 Rated
ambient
19 19 19 19
38 57 100
90
80
Single pole 2-pole 3-pole
70
60
-10 0 10 20 25 30 40 50 60
(Rated ambient 25°C)
182
7. Ordering Information
Rated voltage
Secify DC voltage when for use in Rated voltage
DC circuit
AC
AC 100-440V
200-440V
Standard
Specify the applicable marine Rated sensitivity
standards current 30mA
∗ “CE” is standard. 100 • 200 • 500mA
100 • 200 • 500mA
Built-in
Accessories PAL Pre-alarm (contact output)
Connection F Front connection
OAL Overcurrent alarm
PAL method SL Solderless (box) terminal
B Rear connection
B Pulg-in
PM
Internal AL Alarm switch
accessories AX Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip Type of residual Blank High-speed type
AL, SHT (AC110V) SHT
(Specify rated coil voltage.) carrent protection Specify Time-delay type
Under voltage trip
UVT
External (Specify rated coil voltage.) Insulation switch
Built-in MG
accessories SLT Lead-wire terminal block Accessories EAL Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch
INT Internal terminal type TBM Test button module
MG Pre-alarm module
PAL
MD Electrical operation device
F•S•V Operating handle
Special Purpose Internal AL Alarm switch
Breakers S•I•W Enclosure box
accessories AX Auxiliary switch
MI Mechanical interlock
Under voltage trip
TC
Terminal cover AX, SLT, TBM UVT
(Specity rated coil voltage)
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
SLT Lead-wire terminal block
LC • HL
Quantity Handle lock device
HL-S External
CH Card holder accessories
10 MD Electrical operation device
F•S•V Operating handle
Mag Only
Mag Only (Specicy AC or DC and S•I•W Enclosure box
rated current) MI Mechanical interlock
DC-use Quantity Terminal cover
DC400V (Specify DC 400V, 440V, TC
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
500V, 550V, 600V)
400HZ 400HZ-use 10 LC • HL
Handle lock device
HL-S
Low-Inst.
Low-Inst. CH Card holder
(Specify AC or DC and Inst. %)
183
8. Melshort 2
Advantages
●Contents ●Selection Efficiency Improved
The program's menu allows not only short-circuit current Simple, accurate and fast operation is ensured as a result 7
calculations, but also the examination of various of being able to examine the coordination between
protection coordination. various protection systems, and being able to select
breakers interactively on the screen.
●Preparation of single-line connection diagrams.
●Short-circuit calculations.
●Automatic selection of breaker type.
●Software Updates
●Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination. Users can download the latest software updates by
accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page.
●Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination.
●Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection
equipment. http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/lvs
8
●Protection coordination with motor start current.
184
9. L O W- V O LTA G E S W I T C H G E A R T E C H N I C A L
185
INFORMATION SERVICE VIA THE INTERNET
186
MEMO
Country / Region Company Address Telephone
Australia Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd. 348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia + 61-2-9684-7777
Chile Rhona S.A. Agua Santa 4211 P.O. Box 30-D Vina del Mar, Chile + 56-32-2-320-600
17/F., ChuangXing Financial Center,
China Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Shanghai) Ltd. + 86-21-2322-3030
No.288 West Nanjing Road, Shanghai, 200003
10/F., Manulife Tower, 169 Electric Road, North Point,
China Mitsubishi Electric Automation (HongKong) Ltd. + 852-2887-8810
Hong Kong
Colombia Proelectrico Representaciones S.A. Carrera 53 No 29C-73 - Medellin, Colombia + 57-4-235-30-38
9, Rostoum St. Garden City P.O. Box 165-11516
Egypt Cairo Electrical Group + 20-2-27961337
Maglis El-Shaab, Cairo - Egypt
Europe Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Gothaer Strasse 8, D-40880 Ratingen, Germany + 49-(0)2102-486-0
P.O.Box 5045 Kawasan Industri Pergudangan,
Indonesia P. T. Sahabat Indonesia + 62-(0)21-6610651-9
Jakarta, Indonesia
Korea Mitsubishi Electric Automation Korea Co., Ltd 1480-6, Gayang-Dong, Gangseo-Gu, Seoul, Korea + 82-2-3660-9572
Laos Societe Lao Import Co., Ltd. 43-47 Lane Xang Road P.O. BOX 2789 VT Vientiane Laos + 856-21-215043
Cebaco Center - Block A Autostrade Dora,
Lebanon Comptoir d'Electricite Generale-Liban + 961-1-240445
P.O. Box 11-2597 Beirut - Lebanon
5 Jalan Pemberita U1/49, Temasya Industrial Park,
Malaysia Mittric Sdn Bhd + 603-5569-3748
Glenmarie 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia
NO137/139 Botataung Pagoda Road,
Myanmer Peace Myanmar Electric Co.,Ltd. + 95-(0)1-202589
Botataung Town Ship 11161, Yangon, Myanmar
KHA 2-65, Volt House Dillibazar Post Box:2108,
Nepal Watt&Volt House + 977-1-4411330
Kathmandu, Nepal
Other Middle East Comptoir d'Electricite Cebaco Center - Block A Autostrade Dora
+ 961-1-240430
Arab Countries & Cyprus Generale-International-S.A.L. P.O. Box 11-1314 Beirut - Lebanon
Pakistan Prince Electric Co. 1&16 Brandreth Road, Lahore-54000, Pakistan + 92-(0)42-7654342
24th Fl. Galleria Corporate Center, Edsa Cr. Ortigas Ave.,
Philippines Edison Electric Integrated, Inc. + 63-(0)2-634-8691
Quezon City Metro Manila, Philippines
Al-Shuwayer St. Side way of Salahuddin Al-Ayoubi St.
Saudi Arabia Center of Electrical Goods + 966-1-4770149
P.O. Box 15955 Riyadh 11454 - Saudi Arabia
South Africa CBI-electric: low voltage Private Bag 2016, Isando, 1600, South Africa + 27-(0)11-9282000
6th Fl., No.105, Wu Kung 3rd, Wu-Ku Hsiang,
Taiwan Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd + 886-(0)2-2298-8889
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
77/12 Bamrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak, + 66-223-4220-3
Thailand United Trading & Import Co., Ltd.
Pomprab Bangkok Thailand
Uruguay Fierro Vignoli S.A. Avda. Uruguay 1274, Montevideo, Uruguay + 598-2-902-0808
Calle 7 La Urbina Edificio Los Robles Locales C y D
Venezuela Adesco S.A. + 58-212-241-9952
Planta Baja, Caracas - Venezuela
47-49 Hoang Sa, St., Dakao Ward, Dist 1, Ho Chi Minh City,
Vietnam CTY TNHH-TM SA GIANG + 84-8-9103633
Viet Nam
Safety Tips : Be sure to read the instruction manual fully before using this product.
FACTORY AUTOMATION SYSTEM: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN